TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(a) Electro Chemistry Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Lesson 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
What is a galvanic cell or a voltaic cell ? Give one example.
Answer:
The cell that converts the chemical energy liberated during the redox reaction to electrical energy and exhibits an electrical potential is called galvanic cell or voltaic cell.
Ex : Daniel cell.

Question 2.
Write the chemical reaction used in the construction of the Daniel cell together with the half- cell reactions.
Answer:
In the Daniel cell the following redox reaction occurs.
Zn (s) + Cu2+ (aq) → Zn2+ (aq) + Cu (s)

The reaction is a combination of the two half reactions whose addition gives the overall cell reaction.

  1. Cu2+ (aq) + 2e → Cu (s) (reduction half reaction)
  2. Zn (s) → Zn2+ (aq) + 2e (oxidation half reaction)

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 3.
Name the two half-cell reactions that are taking place In the Daniel cell.
Answer:
The two half cell reactions that are taking place in the Daniel cell are as follows.

  1. Cu2+(aq) + 2e → Cu (s) (reduction half reaction)
  2. Zn (s) → Zn2+ (ag) + 2e (oxidation half reaction)

Question 4.
How is a galvanic cell represented on paper as per IUPAC convention ? Give one example.
Answer:
As per the IUPAC convention the anode is written on the left and the cathode on the right while representing the galvanic cell on paper. A galvanic cell is generally repre-sented by putting a vertical line in between the symbol of the metal (electrode) and formula of the electrolyte in the solution and putting a double vertical line in between the solutions (two electrolyte solutions). This indicates the connecting salt bridge (double vertical lines indicates salt bridge)
Examples: Zn (s) | Zn2+ (aq) || Cu2+ (aq) | Cu

Question 5.
Write the cell reaction taking place in the cell.
Cu(S) | Cu2+(aq) || Ag+ (aq) | Ag(S)
Answer:
As per the IUPAC convention the left hand side electrode is anode and right hand side electrode is cathode. At anode oxidation takes place while at cathode reduction takes place. These reactions can be shown as follows.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 62

Question 6.
What is standard hydrogen electrode?
Answer:
Standard hydrogen electrode is used as reference electrode. Its potential was arbit-rarily fixed as zero. It consists of a platinum electrode coated with platinum black. The electrode is dipped in a solution of acid (us-ually 1M HCO and pure H2 gas is bubbled through it at atmospheric pressure (or 1 bar). The concentration of H+ is unity (1M).

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 7.
Give a neat sketch of standard hydrogen electrode
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 1

Question 8.
What is Nernst equation? Write the equation for an electrode With electrode reaction
Mn+ (aq) + ne \(\rightleftharpoons\) M(s).
Answer:
The value of electrode potential changes with the variation in the concentration of the ions. The equation which shows the relationship between the concentration of ions and electrode potentials is known as Nernst equation.
The Nernst equation for the electrode with electrode reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 2
R = Gas constant (8.314 JK-1 mol-1)
F = Faraday constant (96487 C mol-1)
T = Temperature in θ kelvin scale [Mn+] is the concentration of the species Mn+.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 9.
A negative Eθ indicates that the redox couple is… reducing couple than H+ / H2, couple, (powerful or weak)
Answer:
Powerful.
More the negative reduction potential stronger the reducing agent.

Question 10.
A positive Eθ indicates that the redox couple is a weaker … couple than H+ / H2 couple. (oxidising or reducing)
Answer:
Oxidising.

More positive Eθ indicates stronger oxidation property while more negative Eθ indicates stronger reducing property.

Question 11.
Write the Nernst equation for the EMF of the cell
Ni (s) / Ni2+ (aq) / / Ag+ (aq) / Ag
Answer:
The cell reaction is
Ni (s) + 2Ag+ (aq) → Ni2+ (aq) + 2Ag (s),
The Nernst equation is written as
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 3
R = Gas constant 8.3 14 JK mol-1
F = Faraday constant 96487 C mol-1
T = Temperature in kelvin scale

Question 12.
Write the cell reaction for which Ecell =
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 4
Answer:
Mg(s) + 2Ag+ (aq) → Mg2+ (aq) + 2Ag (s).

Question 13.
How is Eθ cell related mathematically to the equilibrium constant Kc of the cell reaction?
Answer:
\(\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^\theta\) is related mathematically to equilibrium constant Kc as follows.
\(\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^\theta\) = \(\frac{2.303 \mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{nF}}\) log KC
R = Gas constant 8.3 14 JK mol-1
F = Faraday constant 96487 C mol-1
T = Temperature in kelvin scale
Kc = Equilibrium constant

Question 14.
How is Gibbs energy (G) related to the
Answer:
The emf of the cell E is related to Gibbs energy (G) as follows
ΔrG = -nFEcell
ΔrG = Gibbs energy
n = number of electrons Involved in the reaction
F = Faraday constant 96487 C mol-1
Ecell = cell emf

Question 15.
Define conductivity of a material. Give its SI units.
Answer:
Conductivity is the reciprocal of resistivity. It may also be defined as the conductance of one centimetre cube of the conductor. It is generally denoted by a Greek letter Kappa(K)
k = \(\frac{1}{\rho}\) = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{R}}\left(\frac{l}{a}\right)\)
Units: The units of conductivity in SI units is S m-1 or Ω-1 m-1.
Where S = Siemen

Question 16.
What is cell constant of a conductivity cell?
Answer:
In a conductivity cell the resistance of solution is given by the equation
R = \(\rho \frac{l}{A}\) = \(\frac{l}{\mathrm{KA}}\)
The quantity l/A is called cell constant denoted by the symbol G.

Question 17.
Define molar conductivity \(\Lambda_m\) and how is it related to conductivity (K)?
Answer:
Molar conductivity is defined as the conductance of a solution kept between the electrodes at unit distance apart and having area of cross – section large enough to accommodate sufficient volume of the solution that contains one mole of electrolyte. It is denoted by the symbol \(\Lambda_m\).
The molar conductivity \(\Lambda_m\) and conductivity K are related as
K = \(\frac{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}}{\mathrm{V}}\) (or) \(\Lambda_m\) = KV
V is the volume containing one mole of electrolyte.

Question 18.
Give the mathematical equation which gives the variation of molar conductivity \(\Lambda_m\) with the molarity (c) of the solution.
Answer:
The mathematical equation that gives the variation of molar conductivity \(\Lambda_m\) with the molaritý (c) of the solution is as follows. \(\Lambda_m\) (S cm2 mol-1)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{K}\left(\mathrm{S} \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\right)}{1000 \mathrm{~L} \mathrm{~m}^{-3} \times \text { molarity }\left(\mathrm{mol} \mathrm{L}^{-1}\right)}\)
If we use S cm-1 as the units for K and mol cm-3, the units of concentration, then the units for \(\Lambda_m\) are S cm2 mol-1. It can be calculated by using the equation
\(\Lambda_m\) (S cm2 mol-1)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{K}\left(\mathrm{S} \mathrm{cm}^{-1}\right) \times 1000\left(\mathrm{~cm}^3 / \mathrm{L}\right)}{\text { molarity }(\mathrm{mol} / \mathrm{L})}\)

Question 19.
State Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
Answer:
The Kohlrausch’s law of independent migra-tion of ions states that “limiting molar con-ductivity of an electrolyte can be represented as the sum of the individual contributions of the anion and the cation of the electrolyte”.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 20.
State Faraday’s first law of electrolysis. (AP Mar. 18, 16; TS 15; IPE 14)
Answer:
The amount of chemical reaction which occurs at any electrode during electrolysis is proportional to the quantity of current passing through the electrolyte (solution or melt). *
W ∝ Q

Question 21.
State Faraday’s second law of electrolysis. (Mar. 2018-TS, IPE 14)
Answer:
The amounts of different substances liberated, when the same quantity of current is passing through the electrolyte solution are proportional to their chemical equivalent weight (Atomic mass of metal ÷ number of electrons required to reduce the cation).
Mathematically: \(\frac{W_1}{W_2}=\frac{E_1}{E_2}\)

Question 22.
What are the products obtained at the platinum anode and the platinum cathode respectively in the electrolysis of fused
or molten NaCl?
Answer:
Electrolysis of fused or molten NaCl gives chlorine gas at anode and sodium metal at
cathode.
NaCl → Na+ + Cl
2C → Cl2 (g) + 2e at anode
Na+ + e → Na (s) at cathode

Question 23.
Give the products obtained at the platinum electrodes (cathode and anode) when aqueous solution of K2 SO4 is electrolysed.
Answer:
In aqueous solution of K2SO4 the following reactions occur
K2SO4 → 2K+ + \(\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}\)
The reactions taking place during electrolysis are
2H2O → O2 + 4H+ + 4e at anode.
4H2O + 4e → 2H2 + 4OH at cathode.
So at anode oxygen gas and at cathode hydrogen gas will be liberated,

Question 24.
Write the chemical equation corresponding to the oxidation of H2O(l) at the platinum anode.
Answer:
2H2O → O2 + 4H+ + 4e at Pt anode.

Question 25.
Give the chemical equation that represents the reduction of liquid water H2O(l) at the platinum cathode.
Answer:
4H2O + 4e → 2H2(g) + 4OH at Pt cathode.

Question 26.
What is a primary battery? Give one example. (AP 17)
Answer:
Primary batteries are the type óf batteries which become dead over a period of time and chemical reaction stops. They cannot be recharged or used again some common examples are dry cell, mercury cell etc.

Question 27.
Give one example for a secondary battery. Give the cell reaction.
Answer:
The most familiar example of secondary battery is lead storage battery.
Anode reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 5

Question 28.
Give the cell reaction of nickel – cadmium secondary battery.
Answer:
The overall reaction of nickel – cadmium secondary battery is
Cd (s) + 2 Ni (OH)3 (s) → CdO (s) + 2Ni (OH)2 (s) + H2O (l)

Question 29.
What is a fuel cell ? How is it different from a coventional galvanic cell ?
Answer:
Galvanic cells that are designed to convert the energy of combustion of fuels like hydrogen, methane, methanol, etc. directly into electrical energy are called fuel cells.
Galvanic cells directly convert chemical energy into electricity. In fuel cells reactants are fed continuously to the electrodes and products are removed contionuously from the electrolyte compartment.

Question 30.
Give the electrode reactions occurring at the anode and at the cathode in H2, O2 fuel cell.
Answer:
The electrode reactions occurring at the anode and at the cathode in H2, O2 fuel cell are as follows.
Cathode O2 (g) + 2H2O (l) + 4e → 4OH (aq)
Anode 2H2 (g) + 4OH (aq) → 4H2O (l) + 4e
The overall reaction is
2H2 (g) + O2 (g) → 2H2O (l)

Question 31.
What is metallic corrosion ? Give one example.
Answer:
Corrosion may be defined as the process of slow conversion of metals into their unde-sirable compounds (usually oxides) by rea-ction with moisture and other gases present in the atmosphere.
Examples: The rusting of iron (iron oxide), tarnishing of silver (silver sulphide) deve-lopment of green coating on copper (copper carbonate).

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 32.
Give the electro -chemical reaction that represents the corrosion or rusting of iron.
Answer:
Oxidation of iron takes place at one spot and that spot behaves as anode and the reaction is
Anode 2 Fe (s) → 2Fe2+ + 4e
Electrons released at anodic spot move through the metal and go to another spot on the metal and reduce oxygen at it in presence of H+. This spot behaves as cathode.
Cathode O2 (g) + 4H+ (aq) + 4e → 2H2O (s)
The overall reaction is
2Fe (s) + O2 (g) + 4H+ (aq) → 2Fe2+ (aq) + 2H2O (l).

Short Answer Questions (4 Marks)

Question 33.
What are galvanic cells? Explain the work-ing of a galvanic cell with a neat sketch taking Daniell cell as example. (Mar. 2018 – AP & TS)( AP & TS ’15)
Answer:
The device in which chemical energy is converted into electrical energy is called galvanic cell or electrochemical cell or voltaic cell. In a galvanic cell, a redox reaction is carried in an indirect manner and the decrease in free energy during the chemical process is made to appear as electrical energy.

In the Daniell cell a zinc strip is dipped in the ZnSO4 solution and a copper strip is dipped in the CuSO4 solution taken in separate beakers. The two metallic strips which act as electrodes are connected by the conducting wires through Voltmeter. The two solutions are joined by an inverted U – tube known as salt bridge which contain an electrolyte such as KCl, KNO3 or NH4Cl along with gelatin or agar – agar to convert the electrolyte into semi solid paste.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 6

The working of the cell can be understand by the following steps.

  1. Zinc undergoes oxidation to form zinc ions.
    Zn (s) → Zn2+ (aq) + 2e oxidation
  2. The electrons liberated during oxidation are pushed through the connecting wires to copper strip.
  3. Copper ions move towards copper strip, pick up the electrons and get reduced to copper atoms which are deposited at the copper strip.
    Cu2+ (aq) + 2e → Cu (s) Reduction.

The transference of electrons from anode (oxidation) electrode i.e., zinc ele-ctrode) to cathode (reduction electrode i.e., copper electrode) leads to flow of electric current.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 34.
Give the construction and working of a standard hydrogen electrode with a neat diagram.
Answer:
The hydrogen electrode consists of platinum electrode coated with platinum black. The electrode is dipped in a solution of acid (us-ually 1M HCl) and pure H2 gas is bubbled through it, at atmospheric pressure (or 1 bar). The concentration of H+ is unity (1M). For this electrode the potential is arbitrarily fixed as zero. This is known as standard hydrogen electrode. It can be represented as.
Pt (s) | H2 (g) | H+ (aq)
Its potential value is zero volts at all temperatures.
The potential corresponds to the reaction.
H+ (aq) + e → \(\frac{1}{2}\)H2(g)
This is called standard hydrogen electrode.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 7
At 298 K the standard hydrogen electrode (SHE) is connected to another half cell and the emf of the cell (SHE II second half cell) gives the reduction potential of the other half cell. If the concentrations of the oxidised and the reduced forms of the species in the right hand half – cell are unity, then the cell emf is equal to standard electrode potential \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{R}}^\theta\) of the given half cell.

Question 35.
State and explain Nernst equation with the help of a metallic electrode and a non metallic electrode.
Answer:
The equation that gives the quantitative relationship between the concentration of ions and electrode potentials is given by Nernst equation. For a general metallic electrode reaction.
Mn+ (aq) + ne → M (s)
The Nernst equation can be written as
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 8
but the concentration of solid M is taken as unity
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 9

R is gas constant (8.314 JK-1 mol-1), F is Faraday constant (96487 C mol-1), T is tem-perature in kelvin scale and [Mn+] is the concentration of the species Mn+. For a general non metallic electrode reaction.
X(g) + ne → Xn-(g).
The Nernst equation can be written as
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 10
But the concentration of gareous X is taken as unity
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 11

Question 36.
Explain with a suitable example the relation between the Gibbs energy of chemical reaction (G) and the functioning of the electrochemical cell.
Answer:
Electrical work done in one second in an electro chemical cell is equal to the electrical potential multiplied by the total charge passing. 1f we want to obtain maximum work from a galvanic cell then the charge has to be passed reversibly. The reversible work done by a galvanic cell is equal to decrease in its Gibbs by a galvanic cell is equal to decrease in its Gibbs energy and therefore, if the emf of the cell is E and nF is the amount of charge passing and ΔrG is the Gibbs energy of the reaction, then
ΔrG = -nF Ecell
Ecell is an intensive parameter but ΔrG is an extensive thermodynamic propery and the value depends on n. Eg: For the reaction
Zn (s) + Cu2+ (aq) () Zn2+ (aq) + Cu (s)
ΔrG = -2F Ecell
If the concentration of each of the reacting species is unity then Ecell = -nF \(\mathrm{E}^\theta \text { cell }\) and we have
ΔrG θ = -nF \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{cel}}^\theta\)

Question 37.
On what factors the electrical conductance of an aqueous solution of electrolyte depends ?
Answer:
The conductivity of electrolytic (ionic) solutions depend on

  1. the nature of the electrolyte.
  2. size and solvation of the ions formed in the dissociation of the electrolyte.
  3. the nature and viscocity of the solvent.
  4. concentration of the electrolyte.
  5. temperature (conductivity increases with increase in temperature).

Question 38.
How is molar conductivity of an aqueous electrolyte solution measured experimen-tally?
Answer:
The conductance of the solution is reciprocal of Its resistance. Therefore, if resistance of the solution is known, its conductance can be easily calculated. The resistance of the electrolytic solution is measured with the help of wheatstone bridge method. Its arrangement is shown in the following fig.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 12

The setup consists of two resistances R3 and R4, a variable resistance R1 and the conductivity cell having solution of unknown resistance R2. An oscillator O (a source of a.c. power in the audio frequency range 550 to 5000 cycles per second) is connected to the bridge. P is a detector of null point (a head phone or an electronic device) and the bridge is balanced when no current passes through the detector. Under these conditions.
Unknown resistance R2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}_1 \mathrm{R}_4}{\mathrm{R}_3}\)
Once the cell constant and the resistance of the solution in the cell are determined the conductivity of the solution is given by the equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 13
Molar conductivity \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}}{\mathrm{C}}\)

Question 39.
Explain the variation of molar conductivity with the change In the concentration of the electrolyte. Give reasons.
Answer:

  1. Molar conductivity (\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\)) values of strong electrolytes is larger than those of weak electrolytes for the same concentration.
  2. Molar conductivity of electrolytes, generally increase with dilution.
  3. Relative increase in the value of \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) for strong electrolyte is quite small as com-pared to that for weak electrolytes.

The degree of ionisatloñ of weak electrolytes is less in aqueous solutions. So their \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) values are less. As the dilution increases the degree of ionisation of weak electrolyte also increases causing more and more ionisation. As a result the value of Am also increases significantlý.

Strong electrolytes ionise almost completely in aqueous solutions at all concentrations. Hence the values of their \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) are generally high even at high concentrations. However in concentrated solutions of strong electrolytes there will be significant inter – ionic interactions which reduce the velocity of ions causing lower \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) values. On increasing dilution, ions move away and inter ionic attractions decrease resulting in the increase iñ \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) values.

Question 40.
State and explain Kohlrausch’s law of independent inigration of ions.
Answer:
Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ion states that at infine dilution when the dissociation of electrolyte is complete, each ion makes a definite contribution towards the molar conductivity of electrolyte, irrespective of the nature of the other ion with which it is associated.

Thus the molar conductivity of an ele-ctrolyte at infinite dilution can be expressed as the sum of the contributions from its individual ions. If \(\lambda_{+}^{\circ}\) and \(\lambda_{-}^0\) represent the limiting molar conductivities of cation and anion respectively, Then the limiting molar conductivity of electrolyte at infinite dilution \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}\), is given by
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 14
Where v+ and v represent the number of positive and negative ions furnished by each formula unit of the electrolyte.

For example.

  1. once formula unit of NaCl furnishes one Na+ and one Cl ion, therefore
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 15
  2. one formula unit of BaCl2 furnishes one Ba2+ and two Cl ions, therefore.
    TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 16

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 41.
What is electrolysis? Give Faraday’s first law of electrolysis. (AP 15))
Answer:
The process of chemical decomposition of the electrolyte by the passage of electricity through its molten or dissolved state is called electrolysis.

Faraday’s first law of Electrolysis : This law states that ‘The mass of a substance liberated at the electrode is directly pro-portional to the quantity of electricity passed through the electrolyte.
m ∝ Q(or) m ∝ I × t (or) m = Z × I × t
Here Q = quantity of electricity
I = current in amperes
t = time in seconds
Z = constant of proportionality called electrochemical equivalent
If I = 1 ampere and t = 1 second then m = Z.

Thus the electrochemical equivalent of a substance is the amount of substance liber-ated at the electrode when current of one ampere is passed through the electrolyte for one second.

Question 42.
What are the products obtained at the cathode and the anode during the electrolysis of the following when platinum electrodes are used in the electrolysis.
a) Molten KCl
b) Aq. CuSO4 solution
c) Aq. K2SO4 solution
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 17

Question 43.
What are primary and secondary batteries? Give one example for each. (AP Mar. 19)
Answer:
Primary batteries are those which become dead over a period and the chemical reaction stops. They cannot be recharged or used again. Ex: Dry cell which is a compact form of Leclanche cell.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 18
The cell consists of zinc container and acts as the anode. The cathode is a carbon (graphite) rod surrounded by powdered manganese dioxide and carbon. The space between the electrodes is filled by a moist paste of ammonium chloride and zinc chloride. The electrode reactions are as follows.
Anode Zn (s) → Zn2+ + 2e
Cathode MnO2 + \(\mathrm{NH}_4{ }^{+}\) + e → MnO(OH) + NH3

A secondary cell after its use can be recharged an can be used again.
Example : Lead storage battery. It consists of lead anode and a grid of lead packed with lead dioxide (PbO2) as cathode. A 38% solution of sulphuric acid is used as electrolyte. The cell reactions are
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 19
The overall reaction is
Pb (s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2SO4 (aq) → PbSO4 (s) + 2H2O
These reactions occur during discharge of the battery on charging the above reaction is reversed.

Question 44.
What are fuel cells ? How are they different from galvanic cells ? Give the construction of H2, O2 fuel cell.
Answer:
The cells which convert chemical energy of a fuel directly into electrical energy are called fuel cells. These are the Voltaic cells in which the fuels such as H2, CO, CH4, C8H8 etc. are used to generate electrical energy.

Galvanic cells convert the chemical energy liberated during the redox reaction to electrical energy. The emf of the galvanic cell is more if the intensity of the redox reaction is more. As the time proceeds the intensity of the redox reaction goes on decreasing and the cell becomes dead over a period of time when the cell reaction is completed. In fuel cells the reactants are fed continuously to the electrodes and products are removed continuously from the electrolyte compartment so that electrical energy is produced continuously.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 20
In hydrogen fuel cell hydrogen and oxygen are bubbled through porous carbon electrodes placed in concentrated aqueous sodium hydroxide solution. Catalysts like finely divided platinum or palladium is incorporated into the electrodes for increasing the rate of electrode reactions. The electrode reactions are as follows.
Cathode : O2 (g) + 2H2O (l) + 4e,sup>- → 4OH (aq)
Anode: 2H2 (g) + 4OH (aq) → 4H2O (l) + 4e
The overall reaction
2H2 (g) + O2 (g) → 2H2O (l)

Question 45.
What is metallic corrosion ? Explain it with respect to iron corrosion.
Answer:
Corrosion is a process of slow conversion of metals into oxides or other salts of the metal, generally the same as the compounds of their compounds by reaction with moisture and other gases present in the atmosphere.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 21
Oxidation : Fe (s) → Fe2+ (aq) + 2e
Reduction: O2 (g) + 4H+ (aq) + 4e → 2H2O (1)
Atomospheric oxidation: 2Fe2+ (aq) + 2H2O (1) + 1/2O2 (g) → Fe2O3 (s) + 4H+ (aq)

Corrosion of iron is known as rusting. It occurs in presence of water and air. The corrosion of iron may be considered essentially as an electro chemical phenomenon. At a particular spot of an object made of iron, oxidation takes place and that spot behaves as anode. The reaction is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 22

Long Answer Questions (8 Marks)

Question 46.
What are electro chemical cells ? How are they constructed ? Explain the working of the different types of galvanic cells.
Answer:
The device in which chemical energy is converted into electrical energy is called galvanic cell or electrochemical cell or voltaic cell.

In a galvanic cell, a redox reaction is carried out in an indirect manner and the decrease in free energy during the chemical process is made to appear as electrical energy. The indirect redox reaction is such that reduction and oxidation processes are carried out in separate vessels. The working of different types of galvanic cells can be understand by considering the Zn – CuSO4 reaction as the basis of the cell reaction.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 23
A zinc strip is dipped in zinc sulphate solution and a copper strip is dipped in copper sulphate solution taken in separate beakers. The two metallic strips which act as electrodes are connected by the conducting wire through a voltmeter. The two solutions are joined by a U – tube known as salt bridge which contain some electrolyte such as KCl, KNO3 or NH4Cl along with gelatin or agar – agar to convert it into semi – solid paste.

  1. Zinc undergoes oxidation to form zinc ions.
    Zn (s) > Zn2+ (aq) + 2e (oxidation)
  2. The electrons liberated during oxidation are passed through the connecting wire to copper strip
  3. Copper ions move towards copper strip, pick up electrons and get reduced to copper atoms which are deposited on the copper strip.

At the zinc strip oxidation of zinc atoms takes place and becomes a source of ele-ctrons acquiring negative charge. It acts as anode, since oxidation occurs at it. At the copper strip reduction of copper ions takes place and acquires positive charge. It acts as cathode, since reduction takes place.

The flow of electrons from zinc strip to copper strip produce electric current through the outer circuit from copper to zinc strip which is indicated by the deflection in voltmeter.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 47.
What is electrical conductance of a solution? How is it measured experimentally ?
Answer:
The conduction through the electrolytes is due to the movement of ions produced by the electrolytes in their aqueous solution. It is generally called as electrolytic or ionic conductance.

Conductivity (K) or specific conductance is the reciprocal of resistivity. So if the resistance of the solution is known, its conductance can be easily calculated. The resistance of the electrolytic solution is measured with the help of Wheatstone bridge method. Its arrangement is shown in the figure.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 24
The setup consists of two resistances R3 and R4, a variable resistance R1 and the conductivity cell having solution of unknown resistance R2. An oscillator 0(a source of a.c power in the audio frequency range 550 to 5000 cycles per second) is connected to the bridge. P is a detector of null point (a head phone or an electronic device) and the bridge is balanced when no current device) and the bridge is balanced when no current passed through the detector. Under these conditions
Unknown resistance R2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}_1 \mathrm{R}_4}{\mathrm{R}_3}\)

Once the cell constant and the resistance of the solution in the cell are determined the conductivity of the solution is given by the equation.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 25
Molar Conductivity \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}}{\mathrm{C}}\)

Question 48.
Give the applications of Kohlrausch’s law of independent migration of ions.
Answer:
1) Calculation of limiting molar couductivities of weak electrolytes: Kohlrauschs law is useful in determining the limiting molar conductivities of weak electrolytes. For example, the value of \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}\) for acetic acid (CH3COOH) can be calculated from the limiting molar conductivities of strong electrolytes like CH3COONa, HCl and NaCl.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 26

2) Calculation of degree of dissociation of weak electrolytes: Molar conductivity of weak electrolytes depends upon its degree of dissociation. With increase in dilution the degree of dissociation increases, so molar conductivity also increases. At infinite dilution the dissociation is complete and the molar conductivity of electrolyte becomes maximum attaining limiting molar conductivity (\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}\)).
The degree of ionisation α is given by
α = \(\frac{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\mathrm{c}}}{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}}\)
\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\mathrm{c}}\), is the molar conductivity of solution at any concentration C and \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}\) is the limiting molar conductivity.

3) Calculation of dissociation constant of weak electrolyte: Dissociation constant of weak electrolyte can be calculated from its degree of dissociation at a given concentration.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 27

4) Determining the solubility of sparingly soluble salts : The aqueous solutions of sparingly soluble salts are infinitely dilute solutions due to their extremely low solubility. At the same time they are also saturated solutions so the solubility can be calculated by the measurement of conductivity (K) and molar conductivity (\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}\)) of the aqueous solution.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 28

Question 49.
Give the different types of batteries and explain the construction and working of each type of battery.
Answer:
Batteries are two types:

1) primary batteries and
2) secondary batteries.

1) Primary batteries are those which become dead over a period and the chemical reaction stops. They cannot be recharged or used again.
Ex: Dry cell which is a compact form of Leclanche cell.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 29

The cell consists of zinc container and acts as the anode. The cathode is a carbon (graphite) rod surrounded by powdered manganese dioxide and carbon. The space between the electrodes is filled by a moist paste of ammonium chloride and zinc chloride. The electrode reactions are as follows.
Anode Zn (s) → Zn2+ + 2e
Cathode MnO2 + \(\mathrm{NH}_4^{+}\) + e → MnO(OH) + NH3

2) Secondary cell : After use it can be recharged and can be used again.
Example : Lead storage battery. It consists of lead anode and a grid of lead packed with lead dioxide (PbO2) as cathode. A 38%S solution of sulphuric acid is used as electrolyte. The cell reactions are
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 30
The overall reaction is
Pb (s) + PbO2(s) + 2H2 SO4 (aq) → PbSO4 (s) + 2H2O (l)
These reactions occur during discharge of the battery. On charging the above reaction is reversed.

Questions Based On Numerical Data And Concept

Question 50.
The standard potentials of some electro-des are as follows. Arrange the metals in an increasing order of their reducing power.
1) K+ / K = -2.93 V
2) Ag+ / Ag = 0.80 V
3) Cu2+ / Cu = 0.34 V
4) Mg2+ / Mg = -2.37V
5) Cr3+ / Cr = -0.74 V
6) Fe2+ / Fe = -0.44 V
Answer:
Higher the value of oxidation potential or lower the reduction potential greater is the tendency of elements to oxidise and higher will be its reducing power. Thus the correct arrangement in decreasing order or their \(\mathrm{E}_{\text {red }}^\theta\)value is
Ag < Cu < Fe < Cr < Mg < K.

Question 51.
Calculate the emf of the cell at 25°C Cr | Cr3+ (0.1 M) || Fe2+ (0.01 M) || Fe2+(0.01M) / Fe given that \(\mathbf{E}_{\mathrm{Cr}^{3+} \mid \mathrm{Cr}}^0\) = -0.74V and \(\mathbf{E}_{\mathrm{Fe}^{2+} / \mathrm{Fe}}^0\) = -0.44 V
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 31
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 32

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 52.
Calculate the potential of a Zn – Zn2+ electrode in which the molarity of Zn2+ is 0.001 M. Given that \(\mathbf{E}_{\mathbf{Z n}^{2+} \mid \mathbf{Z n}}^{\ominus}\) = -0.76 V R = 8.314 JK-1 mol-1 ; F = 96500 C mol-1
Answer:
Nernst equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 33

Question 53.
Determine \(\Delta G^{\ominus}\) for the button cell used in the watches. The cell reaction is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 34
Answer:
In this cell zinc act as anode and silver electrode act as cathode
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 35
= +0.80 – (-0.76) = + 1.56 V
\(\Delta_r G^\theta\) = \(-\mathrm{nFE}_{\text {cell }}^\theta\) = -2 × 96500 × 1.56
= -3.01 × 105 Cv (or) -301 kJ mol-1

Question 54.
Calculate the emf of the cell consisting the following half cells
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 36
Answer:
The cell is
Al / Al3+ (0.001 M) || Ni2+ (0.50 M) / Ni
The cell reaction is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 37

Question 55.
Determine the values of Kc for the follow-ing reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 38
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 39

Question 56.
Calculate the potential of the half – cell containing 0.1 M K2Cr2O7, 0.2 M
\(\mathrm{Cr}^{3+}{ }_{(\mathrm{aq})}\) and 1 × 10-4 M \(\mathrm{H}^{+}(\mathrm{aq})\)
The half – reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 40
Answer:
The given equation is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 41

Question 57.
Calculate K for the reaction at 298 K
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 42
Answer:
Calculation of \(\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^\theta\)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 43
Here zinc electrode is anode and copper electrode is cathode.
∴ \(\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^\theta\) = + 0.34 – (-0.76) = 1.1 V

Calculation of Kc
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 44

Question 58.
Calculate the em! of the cell at 298 K
Sn(s) | Sn2+ (0.05 M) || H+(aq) (0.02 M) | H2 1 atm pt.
Given that \(\mathbf{E}_{\mathrm{Sn}^{2+} \mid \mathbf{S n}}^\theta\) = -0.144 V
Answer:
Cell reaction is
Sn(s) + SH+ (aq) → Sn2+ (aq) + H2 (g) n = 2
According to Nernst equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 45

Question 59.
Calculate the concentration of silver ions in the cell constructed by using 0.1 M concentration of Cu2+ and Ag+ ions. Cu and Ag metals are used as electrodes. The cell potential is 0.422 V
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 46
Answer:
The cell is Cu | Cu2+ Ag+ / Ag
The net cell reaction is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 47
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 48

Question 60.
Calculate the em! of the cell with the cell reaction
Ni (s) + 2Ag+ (0.002 M) ) → Ni2+ (0.160 M) + 2Ag(s) ; \(\mathbf{E}_{\text {cell }}^{\ominus}\) = 1.05 V.
Answer:
The cell reaction is
Ni (s) + 2Ag+ (aq) → Ni2+ (aq) + 2Ag (s)
Here Ni / Ni2+ electrode is anode and Ag+/ Ag electrode is cathode
Applying Nernst equation to above system we have
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 49

Question 61.
Cu2+ + 2e \(\rightleftharpoons\) Cu ; \(\mathbf{E}^{\ominus}\) = +0.34V
Ag+ + e \(\rightleftharpoons\) Ag ; \(\mathbf{E}^{\ominus}\) = + 0.80 V
For what concentration of Ag+ ions will the emf of the cell be zero at 25°C. The concentration of Cu2+ is 0.1 M (log 3.919 = 0.593).
Answer:
Since \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Ag}^{+} / \mathrm{Ag}}^{\ominus}\) is larger than \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Cu}^{2+} / \mathrm{Cu}}^{\ominus}\), reduction will occur at silver electrode and the cell is
Cu2+ / Cu || Ag+ / Ag
The cell reaction is
Cu(s) + 2Ag+(aq) → Cu2+ (aq) + 2 Ag (s)
According to Nernst equation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 50
[Ag+] = (3.89 × 10-16 × 0.1)<sup.1/2
= 6.222 × 10-8.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 62.
The conductivity of 0.20 M solution of KCl at 298 K is 0.0248 S cm-1. Calculate molar conductance.
Answer:
Molar conductivity is given by = \(\frac{1000 \times K}{M}\)
= \(\frac{1000 \times 0.0248 \mathrm{~S} \mathrm{~cm}^{-1}}{0.20 \mathrm{M}}\)
= 12.4 cm2 mol-1

Question 63.
Calculate the degree of dissociation (α) of CH3COOH at 298 K
Given that \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COOH}}^{\infty}\) = 11.75 cm2 mol-1
\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{CH}_3 \mathrm{COO}^{-}}^0\) = 40.95 cm2 mol-1
\(\Lambda_{\mathbf{H}^{+}}^0\) = 349.15 cm2 mol-1
Answer:
The degree of dinociation α is given us
α = \(\frac{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\mathrm{c}}}{\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^0}\)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 51

Intext Questions – Answers

Question 1.
How would you determine the standard electrode potential of the system Mg2+ | Mg?
Answer:
Set up a cell consisting of Mg | MgSO4 (1M) as one electrode (by dipping a magnesium rod in 1M MgSO4 solution) and standard hydrogen electrode Pt,H2(1 atm) | H+ (1M) as the second electrode and measure the EMF of the cell. Also note the direction of deflection in the voltmeter. The direction of deflection shows that electrons flow from magnesium electrode to hydrogen electrode, i.e., oxidation takes place at magnesium electrode and reduction at hydrogen electrode. Hence the cell may be represented as follows.
Mg | Mg2+ (1M) || H+ (1M) | H2, (1 atm), Pt
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 52

Question 2.
Can you store copper sulphate solutions in zinc pot ?
Answer:
As \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{Zn}^{2+} \mid \mathrm{Zn}}\) (-076 V) is lower than
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 53 (+0.34 V), therefore, Cu2+ ions can oxidise Zn to Zn2+ ions according to the reaction.
Cu2+ (aq) + Zn (s) → Zn2+ (aq) + Cu (s)
Hence, CuSO4 solution cannot be stored in zinc pot.

Question 3.
Consult the table of standard electrode potentials and suggest three substances that can oxidise ferrous ions under suitable conditions.
Answer:
Fe2+ → Fe3+ + \(\mathrm{e}^{-} \mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{oxid}}^{\ominus}\) = – 0.77 V
Only those substances can oxidise Fe2+ to Fe3+ which are stronger oxidising agents than 0.77V so that the EMF of the cell reaction is positive. This is so for elements lying below Fe3+ | Fe2+ in the electrochemical series e.g. F2, Cl2, Ag+ etc.

Question 4.
Calculate the potential of hydrogen ele-ctrode placed in a solution of pH 10.
Answer:
The reduction half reaction for hydrogen electrode is
2H+ (aq) + 2e → H2 (g)
Applying Nernst equation
E = \(\mathrm{E}^{\ominus}\) + \(\frac{0.059}{2}\)log [H+]2
= 0 + 0.059 log [H+]
pH = 10
∴ – log [H+] = -10
(or) log [H+] = – 10
∴ E = 0.059 (-10) = -0.59V

Question 5.
Calculate the emf of the cell in which the following reaction is taking place :
Ni (s) + 2Ag+ (0.002 M) → Ni2+ (0.160 M) + 2Ag(s)
Given that \(\mathbf{E}_{\text {(cell) }}^{\ominus}\) = 1.05 V
Answer:
The cell reaction is
Ni (s) + 2Ag+ (aq) → Ni2+ (aq) + 2Ag (s)
Here Ni / Ni2+ electrode is anode and Ag+ / Ag electrode is cathode.
Applying Nernst equation to above system we have
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 54

Question 6.
The cell in which the following cell reaction occurs:
2Fe3+ (aq) + 2e (aq) → 2 Fe2+ (aq) + I2(s) has \(E_{\text {cell }}^{\ominus}\) = 0.236V at 298 K. Calculate the standard Gibbs energy and the equilibrium constant of the cell reaction.
Answer:
2Fe3+ (aq) + 2e (aq) → 2 Fe2+ or 2I → I2 + 2e
Hence, for the given cell reaction n = 2
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 55

Question 7.
Why does the conductivity of a solution decrease with dilution?
Answer:
Conductivity of a solution is the conductance of ions present in a unit volume of the solution. On dilution the number of ions per unit volume decreases. Hence the conductivity decreases.

Question 8.
Suggest a way to determine the \(\Lambda_{\mathrm{m}}^{\circ}\) value of water.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 56

Question 9.
The molar conductivity of 0.025 mol L-1 methanoic acid is 46.1 S cm2 mol-1. Calcu-late its degree of dissociation and dissoci-ation constant. Given λ0 (H+) = 349.6 S cm2 mol-1 and λ0 (HCOO) = 54.6 S cm2 mol-1.
Answer:
\(\Lambda_{\mathrm{HCOOH}}^0\) = \(\lambda_{\mathrm{H}^{+}}^0\) + \(\lambda_{\mathrm{HCOO}^{-}}^0\)
= 349.6 + 54.6 S cm2 mol-1
= 404.2 S cm2 mol-1
\(\Lambda^{\mathrm{c}}\) = 46.1 S cm2 mol-1 (Given)
∴ α = \(\frac{\Lambda^c}{\Lambda^0}\) = \(\frac{46.1}{404.2}\) = 0.114
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 57

Question 10.
If a currect of 0.5 ampere flows through a metallic wire for 2 hours, then how many electrons would flow through the wire.
Answer:
Current strength = 0.5 A
Time = 2 hr = 2 × 60 × 60 = 7200 s
Quantity of electricity = 0.5 × 7200 = 3600 C
Electrons flowing for 96500 C of electricity
= 6.02 × 1023
Electrons flowing for 3600 C of electricity
= \(\frac{6.02 \times 10^{23} \times 3600}{96500}\) = 6.02 × 1023

Question 11.
Suggest a list of metals that are extracted electrolytically.
Answer:
Na, K, Ca, Mg and Al (i.e., cations of 1, 2 and 13 groups).

Question 12.
Consider the reaction
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 58
What is the quantity of electricity in coulombs needed to reduce 1 mol of \(\mathrm{Cr}_2 \mathrm{O}_7^{2-}\)?
Answer:
From the given reaction 1 mol of \(\mathrm{Cr}_2 \mathrm{O}_7^{2-}\) ions require 6F = 6 × 96500 C = 579000 C of electricity for reduction of Cr3+.

Question 13.
Write the chemistry of recharging the lead storage battery, highlighting all the materials that are involved during recharging ?
Answer:
During recharging of lead storage battery, electrical energy is supplied externally. The following reactions will take place.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 59

Question 14.
Suggest two materials other than Hydrogen that can be used as fuels in fuel cells.
Answer:
Methane and Methanol

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry

Question 15.
Explain how rusting of Iron is envisaged as setting up of an electrochemical cell.
Answer:
Rusting of Iron occurs in the presence of water and air aiid it may be considered as electrochemical phenomenon.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 60
Oxidation : Fe (s) Fe2+ (aq) + 2e
Reduction: O2 (g) + 4H+ (aq) + 4e → 2H2O (1)
Atomospheric
oxidation : 2Fe2+ (aq) + 2H2O (1) + 1/2O2 (g) → Fe2O3 (s) + 4H+ (aq)
At a particular spot of Iron, oxidation takes place and that spot acts as anode.
Anode : 2Fe (s) → 2Fe+2 + 4e,
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 3(a) Electro Chemistry 61
The electrons released at anodic spot go to mother spot on the metal and reduce oxygen at that spot in the presence of H+
Cathode : O2 (g) + \(4 \mathrm{H}^{+} \text {(aq) }\) + 4e → 2H2O (l) \(\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{H}^{+}\left|\mathrm{O}_2\right| \mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}^{\ominus}\) = 1.23 V
Overall reaction :
2Fe(s) + O2 (g) + 4H+ → 2Fe+2 (aq) + 2H2O (l), \(\mathrm{E}_{\text {cell }}^{\ominus}\) = 1.67V
The Ferrous ions are further oxidised by atmospheric oxygen to Ferric ions which come out as rust in the form of hydrated Ferric oxide.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Students must practice these Maths 1A Important Questions TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 1.
If f : A → B, g : B → C are two bijective functions, then prove that gof : A → C is also a bijective function. [Mar. 18, 16 (AP), 09 ; May 13, 12, 10, 08, 06, 04 00, 96, 92]
Answer:
Since f: A →B is a bijective function
o f: A → B is both one-one and onto functions.
Since f: A → B is a one-one function
⇔ a1, a2 ∈ A, f(a1) = f(a2) ⇒ a1 = a2
Since f: A → B is a onto function ⇔ ∃ one element a ∈ A such that f(a) = b, ∀ b ∈ B.
Since g: B → C is a bijective function
⇔ g: B → C is both one-one and onto functions.
Since g: B → C is a one-one function
⇔ b1, b2 ∈ B, g (b1) = g (b2) ⇒ b1 = b2
Since g: B → C is an onto function ⇔ ∃ one element b e B such that g(b) = c, ∀ c ∈ C.
If f: A → B, g : B → C ⇒ gof: A → C.

To prove that gof: A → C is a one-one function:
If gof: A → C is a one-one function
⇔ a1, a2 ∈ A, (gof) (a1) = (gof) (a2) ⇒ a1 = a2
Now (gof) (a1) = (gof) (a2)
g [f(a1)] = g [ f(a2)] [∵ g is one-one]
f(a1) = f(a2) [∵ f is one-one]
a1 = a2
Hence, gof: A → C is a one-one function.

To prove that gof: A → C is an onto function:
Let c ∈ C
If gof: A → C is an onto function ⇔ ∃ one element a ∈ A, such that
(gof) (a) = c, ∀ c ∈ C.
Now (gof) (a) = g [f(a)] = g(b) = c
Thus for any element c ∈ C, there is an element a ∈ A such that (gof) (a) = c.
∴ gof: A → C is an onto function.
Since gof: A → C is both one-one function and onto function then
gof: A → C is a bijective function.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 2.
If f : A → B, g : B → C are two bijective functions, then prove that (gof)-1 = f-1og-1. [Mar. ’16 (TS), 14, 11, 10, 06, 04, 02, 00, 92; May 15 (AP) 14, 11, 09, 02, 98, 94 Mar. 19 (AP) ]
Answer:
Since f: A → B, g : B → C are bijections
⇒ gof: A → C is a bijection
⇒ (gof)-1: C → A is also a bijection
Since f: A → B is a bijective function
then f-1: B → A is also a bijective function
Since g: B → C is a bijective function
then g-1: C → B is also a bijective function
⇒ f-1og-1: C → A is also a bijection
Since the two functions (gof)-1, f-1og-1 are from C → A their domains are same.
Let c ∈ C
Since f : A → B is onto ⇔ ∃ one element
a ∈ A such that
f(a) = b, ∀ b ∈ B
f(a) = b ⇒ f-1 (b) = a
Since g : B → C is onto ⇔ ∃ one element be B such that g(b) = c, ∀ c ∈ C
g(b) = c ⇒ g-1(c) = b
Now (gof) (a) = g[f(a)] = g (b) = c ⇒ a = (gof)-1(c)
⇒ (gof)-1(c) = a ………………. (1)
Also (f-1og-1) (c) = f-1 [g-1(c)] = f-1(b) = a ……………… (2)
∴ From (1) and (2)
(gof)-1(c) = (f-1og-1) (c)
∴ (gof)-1 = f-1og-1.

Question 3.
Let f : A → B, is a function and IA, IB are identity functions on A and B respectively. Then prove that foIA = f = IBof. [Mar. 18 (TS); Mar. 13, 08, 05; May 92]
Answer:
If f: A → B is a function.
If IA and IB are identity functions on A and B respectively.
i.e., IA : A → B, IB : B → B

(i) IA: A → A, f: A → B ⇒ f o IA : A → B
Hence, functions f o IA and f are defined on same domain A.
Let a ∈ A
(f o IA) (a) = f[IA (a)] = f(a)
∴ f o IA = f

(ii) f: A → B, IB: B → B ⇒ IB o f: A → B
The functions (IB o f) and f are defined on the same domain A.
Let a ∈ A
Now (IB o f)(a) = IB[f(a)] = f(a)
∴ IB o f = f ………………. (2)
From (1) and (2) we get
f o IA = IB o f = f

Question 4.
If f: A → B is a bijection, then prove that fof-1 = IB and f-1 o f = IA. [Mar. 17, 15 (AP); Mar. 12, 07, 03, 02; May 07, 05, 01 Mar. 19 (TS)]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 1

(i) Since f: A → B is a bijection ⇒ f-1: B → A is also a bijection
IA; f: A → B, f-1: B → A ⇒ f-1 o f: A → A is also bijection
Clearly IA: A → A such that IA(a) = a, ∀ a ∈ A
Let a ∈ A
Since f-1: B → A is onto function ⇔ ∃ one element b ∈ B,
such that
f-1(b) = a, ∀ a ∈ A
f-1 (b) = a ⇒ f(a) = b
Now (f-1of) (a) = f-1[f(a)] = f-1(b) = a = IA(a)
∴ f-1of = IA

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

(ii) Since f: A → B is a bijection ⇒ f-1: B → A is also bijection
IB: f-1:B → A, f: A → B = fof-1:B → B is also a bijection
Clearly IB: B → B such that IB(b) = b, ∀ b ∈ B
Let b ∈ B
Since f-1: B → A is an onto function ⇔ ∃
one element b ∈ B such that f-1(b) = a, ∀ a ∈ A
f-1(b) = a ⇒ f(a) = b
Now (fof-1) (b) = f[f-1(b)] = f(a) = b = IB(b)
∴ fof-1 = IB

Question 5.
If f:A → B, g:B → A are two functions such that gof = IA and fog = IB, then prove that f is a bijection and g = f-1. [May 15 (TS); Mar. 08, 01; May 03]
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 2
(i) To prove that f is one-one
Let a1, a2 ∈ A and since f : A → B, f(a1), f(a2) ∈ B
Now f(a1) = f(a2 ) ⇒ g[f(a1)] = g[f(a2)]
⇒ (gof) (a1) = (gof) (a2)
⇒ IA(a1) = IA(a2)
∴ a1 = a2
∴ f is one-one

(ii) To prove that f is onto
Let b be an element of B
IB (b) = (fog) (b)
⇒ b = f[g(b)] ⇒ f(g(b)) = b
i.e., there exists a pre-image g(b) ∈ A for b, under the mapping f.
∴ f is onto
Thus ‘f’ is one-one and onto hence, f-1: B → A exists and is also one-one onto.

(iii) To prove g = f-1
Now g:B → A and f-1:B → A
Let a ∈ A and b be the f – image of a where b ∈ B
∴ f(a) = b ⇒ a = f-1 (b)
Now g(b) = g[f(a)] (gof) (a) = IAA(a) = a
⇒ a = f-1 (b)
∴ g = f-1

Question 6.
If f:A → B, g: B → C and h: C → D are three functions then prove that ho(gof) = (hog) of. That is composition of functions is associative. [May ‘99, ‘95]
Answer:
f:A → B, g:B → C, h:C → D be three functions.
f:A → B, and g:B → C = gof: A → C
Now gof: A → C and h:C → D ⇒ ho(gof): A → D
g:B → C and h:C → D = (hog):B → D
Now f: A → B ⇒ hog: B→D
(hog)of: A → D
Thus ho(gof) and (hog)of both exist and have the same domain A and co-domain D.
Let a ∈ A,
Hence ho(gof) = (hog) of ∈ A
Now [ho(gof)] (a) = h [(gof) (a)] = h[g(f(a))]
= (hog) [f(a)] = [(hog) of] (a)
∴ [ho(gof)] (a) = [(hog) of] (a)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 7.
If f: A → B, g: B → C be surjections, then show that gof: A → C is a surjection. [May 98, 97, 96, 94, 93, 91]
Answer:
Let c ∈ C
Since f: A → B is a onto ⇔ ∃ one element
a ∈ A such that f(a) = b,∀ b ∈ B
Since g: B → C is a onto ⇔ ∃ one element
b ∈ B such that g(b) = c, ∀ c ∈ C.
If f: A → B, g:B → C = gof: A → C
To prove that gof : A → C is a onto
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 3
If gof : A → C is a onto ⇔ ∃ one element a ∈ A
such that
(gof) (a) = c, ∀ c ∈ C.
Now (gof) (a) = g[f(a)] = g(b) = c
Thus for any element c € C, there is an
element a ∈ A such that (gof) (a) = c.
∴ gof: A → C is an onto function.

Question 8.
If f = ((1, a), (2, c), (4, d), (3, b)} and g-1 = {(2, a), (4, b), (1, c), (3, d)}, then show that (gof)-1 = f-1og-1. {Mar. 15 (TS); May 07, 93}
Answer:
Given
f = {(1, a), (2, c), (4, d), (3, b))
f-1 = ((a, 1), (c, 2), (d, 4), (b, 3))
g = ((a, 2), (b, 4), (c, 1), (d, 3))
g-1 = {(2, a), (4, b), (1, c), (3, d)}

gof:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 4

∴ gof = {(1, 2), (2, 1), (3, 4), (4, 3)}
(gof)-1 = {(2, 1), (1, 2), (4, 3), (3, 4)}
f-1og-1
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 5
f-1og-1 = {(1, 2), (2, 1), (3, 4), (4, 3)}
∴ (gof)-1 = f-1og-1

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 9.
If the function f is defined by
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 6
then find the values of
(i) f(3)
(ii) f(0)
(iii) f(-1.5)
(iv) f(2) + f(- 2)
(v) f(- 5).
Answer:
Given
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 7
(i) For x > 1; f(x) = x + 2; f(3) = 3 + 2 = 5
(ii) For – 1 ≤ x ≤ 1; f(x) = 2, f(0) = 2
(iii) For – 3 < x < – 1; f(x) = x – 1 ∴ f(- 1.5) = – 1.5 – 1 = – 2.5 (iv) For x > 1, f(x) = x + 2
f(2) = 2 + 2 = 4
For – 3 < x < – 1, f(x) = x – 1
∴ f(- 2) = – 2 – 1 = – 3
f(2) + f(- 2) = 4 – 3 = 1
(v) f(- 5) is not defined.

Question 10.
If A = {- 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2) and f: A → B is a surjection defined by f(x) = x2 + x + 1 find B.
Answer:
Given, A = {- 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2)
f(x) = x2 + x + 1
Since f : A → B is a surjection then f(A) = B
f(-2) = (- 2)2 – 2 + 1 = 4 – 2 + 1 = 3
f(-1) = (- 1)2 – 1 + 1 = 1 – 1 + 1 = 1
f(0) = 02 + 0 + 1 = 1
f(1) = 12 + 1 + 1 = 1 + 1 + 1 = 3
f(2) = 22 + 2 + 1 = 4 + 2 + 1 = 7
∴ B = f(A) = {3. 1, 7}

Question 11.
If A = {1, 2, 3, 4} and f:A → R is a function defined by f(x) = \(\frac{x^2-x+1}{x+1}\), then find the range of f.
Answer:
Given A = {1, 2, 3, 4) and f(x) = \(\frac{x^2-x+1}{x+1}\)
Since f: A → R is a function, then
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 8

Question 12.
If f: Q → Q, is defined by f(x) = 5x + 4 for all x ∈ Q, find f-1. [Mar. 17 (TS)]
Answer:
Let y = f(x) = 5x + 4
y = f(x) ⇒ x = f-1(y) ……………… (1)
y = 5x + 4 ⇒ y – 4 = 5x
x = \(\frac{y-4}{5}\) ………………… (2)
From (1) and (2),
f-1(y) = \(\frac{y-4}{5}\) ⇒ f(x) = \(\frac{x-4}{5}\), ∀ x ∈ Q

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 13.
If f(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{x-1}\) (x ≠ ± 1), then find (fofofof) (x).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{x-1}\) (x ≠ ± 1)
Now (fofofof) (x) = f[f[f{f(x)}]]
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 9

Question 14.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{16-x^2}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{16-x^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ 16 – x2 ≥ 0
⇒ x2 – 16 ≤ 0
⇒ (x + 4) (x – 4) ≤ 4
⇒ x ∈ [- 4, 4]
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [- 4, 4]

Question 15.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ 9 – x2 ≥ 0
⇒ x2 – 9 ≤ 0
⇒ (x + 3) (x – 3) ≤ 0
⇒ x ∈ [- 3 ,3]
∴ Domain of f’ is [- 3, 3]

Question 16.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{1}{6 x-x^2-5}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{1}{6 x-x^2-5}\) ∈ R
⇒ 6x – x2 – 5 ≠ 0
⇒ x2 – 6x + 5 ≠ 0
⇒ x2 – 5x – x + 5 ≠ 0
⇒ x(x – 5) – 1 (x – 5) ≠ 0
⇒ x – 1 ≠ 0 or x – 5 ≠ 0
⇒ x ≠ 1 or x ≠ 5
∴ x ≠ 1, 5
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is R – {1, 5}

Question 17.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{2 x^2-5 x+7}{(x-1)(x-2)(x-3)}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{2 x^2-5 x+7}{(x-1)(x-2)(x-3)}\) ∈ R
⇒ (x – 1) (x – 2) (x – 3) ≠ 0
⇒ x – 1 ≠ 0, x – 2 ≠ 0, x – 3 ≠ 0
⇒ x ≠ 1, x ≠ 2, x ≠ 3
∴ x ≠ 1, 2, 3
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is R – {1, 2, 3}

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 18.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{2+x}+\sqrt{2-x}}{x}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{2+x}+\sqrt{2-x}}{x}\) ∈ R
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 10
⇒ 2 + x ≥ 0, 2 – x ≥ 0 and x ≠ 0
x ≥ – 2, 2 ≥ x and x ≠ 0
x ≤ 2 and x ≠ 0
⇒ x ∈ [- 2, 0) ∪ (0, 2]
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [- 2, 0) ∪ (0, 2]

Question 19.
If f = {(1, 2), (2, – 3), (3, – 1)}, then find
(i) 2f
(ii) 2 + f
(iii) f2
(iv) √f
Answer:
Given f = {(1, 2), (2, – 3), (3, – 2)}
Domain of ‘f’ is A = {1, 2, 3}
f(1) = 2f(2) = – 3, f(3) = – 1

(i) (2f) (x) = 2f(x)
(2f) (1) = 2f(1) = 2(2) = 4
(2f) (2) = 2f(2) = 2(- 3) = – 6
(2f) (3) = 2f(3) = 2(- 1) = – 2
∴ 2f = {(1, 4), (2, – 6),(3, – 2)}

(ii) (2 + f) (x) = 2 + f(x)
(2 + f) (1) = 2 + f(1) = 2 + 2 = 4
(2 + f) (2) = 2 + f(2) = 2 – 3 = – 1
(2 + f) (3) = 2 + f(3) = 2 – 1 = 1
∴ 2 + f = {(1, 4), (2, – 1), (3, 1)}

(iii) (f2) (x) = [f(x)]2
(f2) (1) = [f(1)]2 = 22 = 4
(f2) (2) = [f(2)]2 = (- 3)2 = 9
(f2) (3) = (f(3)]2 = (- 1)2 = 1
∴ f2 = {(1, 4), (2, 9), (3, 1)}

(iv) (√f)(x) = √f(x)
(√f) (1) = √f(1) = √2
(√f) (2) = √f(2) = √- 3 (not valid)
(√f) (3) = √f(3) = √- 1 (not valid)
∴ √f = {(1, √2)}

Some More Maths 1A Functions Important Questions

Question 1.
If f(x) = \(\frac{\cos ^2 x+\sin ^4 x}{\sin ^2 x+\cos ^4 x}\), ∀ x ∈ R then show that f(2012) = 1.
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 11

Question 2.
If f: R → R is defined by f(x) = \(\frac{1-x^2}{1+x^2}\), then show that f(tan θ) = cos 2θ.
Answer:
Given f: R → R, f(x) = \(\frac{1-x^2}{1+x^2}\)
LHS = f(tan θ)
= \(\frac{1-\tan ^2 \theta}{1+\tan ^2 \theta}\) = cos 2θ + RHS
∴ f(tan θ) = cos 2θ

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 3.
If f: R – {±1} → R is defined by f(x) = log \(\left|\frac{1+x}{1-x}\right|\), then show that f(\(\left(\frac{2 x}{1+x^2}\right)\)) = 2f(x)
Answer:
Given f: R – {±1} → R
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 12

Question 4.
If A = {x/ – 1 ≤ x ≤ 1}, f(x) = x2, g(x) = x3 which of the following are surjections?
(i) f : A → A
(ii) g: A → A
Answer:
(i) Given A = {x/ – 1 ≤ x ≤ 1}
∴ A = {- 1, 0, 1}
f(x) = x2
f(- 1) = (- 1)2 = 1
f(0) = (0)2 = 0
f(1) = (1)2 = 1
∴ f = (- 1, 1), (0 , 0), (1, 1))

f: A → A
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 13
Range of f(A) = {0, 1) ≠ A (co-domain)
∴ f : A → A is not a surjection.

(ii) Given A = {x/ – 1 ≤ x ≤ 1}
∴ A = {- 1, 0, 1}
g(x) = x3
g(- 1) = (- 1)3 = – 1
g(0) = (0)3 = 0
g(1) = (1)3 = 1
∴ g = {(- 1, -1), (0, 0), (1, 1)}
g: A → A
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 14
Range of g(A) = {- 1, 0, 1} = A (co-domain)
∴ g is a surjection.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 5.
If f(x) = cos (log x) then show that
\(f\left(\frac{1}{x}\right) \cdot f\left(\frac{1}{y}\right)-\frac{1}{2}\left[f\left(\frac{x}{y}\right)+f(x y)\right]\) = 0
Answer:
Given f(x) = cos (log x)
f\(\left(\frac{1}{x}\right)\) = cos\(\left(\log \frac{1}{x}\right)\) = cos (log x-1)
= cos (- log x) = cos (log x)
Similarly f\(\left(\frac{1}{y}\right)\) = cos (log y)
f\(\left(\frac{x}{y}\right)\) = cos \(\left(\log \left(\frac{x}{y}\right)\right)\)
= cos (log x – log y)
f(xy) = cos (log xy)
= cos (log x + log y)
L.H.S: f\(\left(\frac{1}{x}\right) \cdot f\left(\frac{1}{y}\right)-\frac{1}{2}\left(f\left(\frac{x}{y}\right)+f(x y)\right)\)
= cos (log x) . cos (log y) – \(\frac{1}{2}\) [cos (log x – log y) + cos (log x + log y)]
= cos (log x) . cos (log y)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 15
= cos (log x) . cos (log y) – cos (log x) . cos (log y) = 0
= R.H.S

Question 6.
Find the inverse function of f(x) = log2x.
Answer:
Given f: (0, ∝) → R, f(x) = log2x
Let y = f(x) = log2x
y = f(x) = x = f-1(y) ……………. (1)
y = log2x ⇒ x = 2y (2)
From (1) & (2)
f-1(y) = 2y
⇒ f-1(x) = 2x

Question 7.
If f(x) = 1 + x + x2 +…….. for |x| < 1, then show that f-1(x) = \(\frac{\mathbf{x}-1}{\mathbf{x}}\).
Answer:
Given that f(x) = 1 + x + x2 + ………….
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{1-\mathrm{x}}\)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 16

Question 8.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mathbf{x}^2-a^2}}\) (a >0). [Mar.15 (AP)]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{x^2-a^2}}\) ∈ R
⇒ x2 – a2
⇒ (x + a) (x – a) > 0
⇒ x < – a or x > a
⇒ x ∈ (- ∝, – a) ∪ (a, ∝)
∴ Domain of f’ is (- ∝, – a) ∪ (a, ∝)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 9.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{(\mathbf{x}-\alpha)(\beta-\mathbf{x})}\) (0 < α < β).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{(\mathbf{x}-\alpha)(\beta-\mathbf{x})}\) ∈ R
⇒ (x – α) (x – β) ≥ 0
⇒ (x – α) (x – β) ≤ 0
⇒ α ≤ x ≤ β
⇒ x ∈ [α, β]
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [α, β]

Question 10.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{2-x}+\sqrt{1+x}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{2-x}+\sqrt{1+x}\) ∈ R
⇒ 2 – x ≥ 0 and 1 + x ≥ 0
⇒ 2 ≥ x and x ≥ – 1
⇒ x ≤ 2 and x ≥ – 1
⇒ x ∈ [- 1, 2]
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [-1, 2]
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 17

Question 11.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{|\mathbf{x}|-\mathbf{x}}\)
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{|\mathbf{x}|-\mathbf{x}}\) ∈ R
⇒ |x| – x ≥ 0
⇒ |x| ≥ x
⇒ x ∈ R
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is ‘R.

Question 12.
Find the domain and range of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{2+x}{2-x}\)
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{2+x}{2-x}\) ∈ R
⇒ 2 – x ≠ 0 ⇒ x ≠ 2
Domain of T is R – { 2 }.
Let y = f(x) = \(\frac{2+x}{2-x}\)
y = \(\frac{2+x}{2-x}\)
2yx – xy = 2 + x
2y – 2 = x + xy
2y – 2 = x(1 + y)
x ∈ R – {2}, y + 1 ≠ 0
y ≠ – 1
∴ Range of ‘f’ is R – {- 1}.

Question 13.
Find the domain and range of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\) [Mar. 15 (TS)]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ 9 – x2 ≥ 0
⇒ x2 – 9 ≤ 0
⇒ (x + 3) (x -3) ≤ 0
⇒ x ∈ [- 3, 3]
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [- 3, 3]
Let y = f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\)
y = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\)
y2 = 9 – x2
x2 = 9 – y2
x = \(\sqrt{9-y^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ 9 – y2 ≥ 0
⇒ y2 – 9 ≤ 0
⇒ (y + 3) (y – 3) ≤ 0
⇒ y ∈ [- 3, 3]
But f(x) attains only non-negative values.
∴ Range of f = [0, 3].

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 14.
Determine whether the function f(x) = x\(\left(\frac{e^x-1}{e^x+1}\right)\) is even or odd.
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 18
Since f(- x) = f(x) then f is an even function.

Question 15.
Determine whether the function f(x) = log(x + \(\sqrt{x^2+1}\)) is even or odd.
Answer:
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type 19
Since f(- x) = – f(x) then f(x) is an odd function.

Question 16.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = log [x – (x)].
Answer:
Given f(x) = log [x – (x)] ∈ R
⇒ x – (x)> 0
⇒ x > (x)
Then x is a non – integer.
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is R – Z.

Question 17.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\log (2-x)}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\log (2-x)}\) ∈ R
⇒ log (2 – x) ≠ 0 and 2 – x > 0
⇒ log (2 – x) ≠ log 1 and 2 > x
⇒ 2 – x ≠ 1 and x < 2
⇒ x ≠ 1
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is (- ∝, 1) ∪ (1, 2)

Question 18.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{\mathbf{x}-[\mathbf{x}]}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{\mathbf{x}-[\mathbf{x}]}\) ∈ R
⇒ [x] – x ≥ 0 ⇒ x ≥ [x] ⇒ x ∈ R
∴ Domain of ’f is Z.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 19.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{[\mathbf{x}]-\mathbf{x}}\).
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{[\mathbf{x}]-\mathbf{x}}\) ∈ R
⇒ [x] – x ≥ 0 ⇒ [x] ≥ x ⇒ x ∈ Z
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is Z.

Question 20.
If f and g are real valued functions defined by f(x) = 2x – 1 and g(x) = x2 then find
(i) (3f – 2g)(x)
(ii) (fg) (x)
(iii) \(\left(\frac{\sqrt{f}}{g}\right)\)(x)
(iv) (f + g + 2) (x)
Answer:
Given f(x) = 2x – 1 and g(x) = x2
Domain of f = domain of g R
Hence the domain of all the functions is R.
(i) (3f – 2g) (x) = 3f(x) – 2g(x)
= 3(2x – 1) – 2(x2)
= 6x – 3 – 2x2
= – 2x2 + 6x – 3

(ii) (fg)(x) f(x) . g(x)
= (2x – 1)(x2) = 2x3 – x2.

(iii) \(\left(\frac{\sqrt{f}}{g}\right)\) (x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{f(x)}}{g(x)}\) = \(\frac{\sqrt{2 x-1}}{x^2}\)

(iv) (f + g + 2) (x) = f(x) .g(x) + 2
= 2x – 1 + x2 + 2
= x2 + 2x + 1 = (x + 1)2

Question 21.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{x^2-3 x+2}\).
Answer:
Given f(x)= \(\sqrt{x^2-3 x+2}\) ∈ R
⇒ x2 – 3x + 2 ≥ 0
⇒ x2 – 2x – x + 2 ≥ 0
⇒ x(x – 2) – 1(x – 2) ≥ 0
⇒ (x – 1) (x – 2) ≥ 0
⇒ x ≤ 1 or x ≥ 2
⇒ x ∈ (- ∝, 1] ∪ [2, ∝)
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is (- ∝, 1] ∪ [2, ∝)

Question 22.
f:R → R defined by f(x) = \(\frac{2 x+1}{3}\), then this function Is injection or not ? Justify. (Mar. 15 (TS)
Answer:
Given that f(x) = \(\frac{2 x+1}{3}\)
Let x1, x2 ∈ R.
Take f(x1) = f(x2) ⇒ \(\frac{2 x_1+1}{3}=\frac{2 x_2+1}{3}\)
⇒ 2x1 + 1 = 2x2 + 1 ⇒ 2x1 = 2x2 = x1 = x2
∴ f(x1) = f(x2) ⇒ x1 = x2
⇒ f is one – one.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Long Answer Type

Question 23.
If f = {(4, 5), (5, 6),(6, – 4)} and g = ((4, – 4), (6, 5), (8, 5)) then find f + g and fg. [Mar. ‘17(TS)]
Answer:
Given f = {(4, 5), (5, 6), (6, – 4)} and
g = {(4, – 4), (6, 5), (8, 5’)) then domain of f = {4, 5, 6) and Range of f = {4, 6, 8}
Domain of f + g = A ∩ B = {4, 6}
= (domain of f) ∩ (domain of g)
(i) f.g={(4, 5, – 4), (6, – 4 + 5)}
= {(4, 1), (6, 1)}

(ii) Domain of fg = (domain of f) ∩ (domain of g)
= A ∩ B = (4, 6)
= {(4, 5 × – 4).(6, – 4 × 5)}.
= {(4, – 20), (6, – 20)}

Question 24.
If f(x) = 2x – 1, g(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{2}\) for all x ∈ R, are two functions, then find,
(i) (gof) (x)
(ii) (fog) (x) [Mar. 19(TS)]
Answer:
Given f(x) = 2x – 1, g(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{2}\)

(i) (gof) (x) = g[ f(x) ]
= g[2x – 1] = \(\frac{2 x-1+1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2 x}{2}\) = x

(ii) (fog) (x) = f [g(x)]
= \(f\left(\frac{x+1}{2}\right)\) = 2\(\left(\frac{\mathrm{x}+1}{2}\right)\) – 1 = x + 1 – 1 = x

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 7th Lesson Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 7th Lesson Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Is it necessary that a mass should be present at the centre of mass of any system? [AP May. ’16; May ’14]
Answer:
No. It is not necessary to present some mass at centre of mass of the system.
Ex: At the centre of ring (or) bangle, there is no mass present at centre of mass.

Question 2.
What is the difference in the positions of a girl carrying a bag in one of her hands and another girl carrying a bag in each of her two hands?
Answer:
i) a) When she carries a bag in one hand her centre of mass will shift to the side of the hand that carries the bag.
b) When a bag is in one hand some unbalanced force will act on her and it is difficult to carry.

ii) If she carries two bags in two hands then her centre of mass remains unchanged. Force on two hands are equal i.e. balanced so it is easy to carry the bags.

Question 3.
Two rigid bodies have same moment of inertia about their axes of symmetry. Of the two, which body will have greater kinetic energy?
Answer:
Relation between angular momentum and kinetic energy is, KE = \(\frac{L^2}{2I}\)

Because moment of inertia is same the body with large angular momentum will have larger kinetic energy.

Question 4.
Why are spokes provided in a bicycle wheel? [AP May ’14]
Answer:
The spokes of cycle wheel increase its moment of inertia. The greater the moment of inertia, the greater is the opposition to any change in uniform rotational motion. As a result the cycle runs smoother and speeder. If the cycle wheel had no spokes, the cycle would be driven in jerks and hence unsafe.

Question 5.
We cannot open or close the door by applying force at the hinges. Why? [AP May ’16]
Answer:
To open or close a door, we apply a force normal to the door. If the force is applied at the hinges the perpendicular distance of force is zero. Hence, there will be no turning effect however large force is applied.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 6.
Why do we prefer a spanner of longer arm as compared to the spanner of shorter arm?
Answer:
The turning effect of force, τ = \(\overline{\mathrm{r}}\times\overline{\mathrm{F}}\). When arm of the spanner is long, r is larger. Therefore smaller force (F) will produce the same turning effect. Hence, the spanner of longer arm is preferred as compared to the spanner of shorter arm.

Question 7.
By spinning eggs on a table top, how will you distinguish an hard boiled egg from egg? [AP Mar. ’13]
Answer:
To distinguish between a hard boiled egg and a raw egg, we spin each on a table top. The egg which spins at a slower rate shall be a raw egg. This is because in a raw egg, liquid matter inside tries to get away from the axis of rotation. Therefore, its moment of inertia ‘I’ increases. As τ = Iα = constant, therefore, α decreases i.e., raw egg will spin with smaller angular acceleration.

Question 8.
Why should a helicopter necessarily have two propellers?
Answer:
If the helicopter had only one propeller, then due to conservation of angular momen¬tum, the helicopter itself would turn in the opposite direction. Hence, the helicopter should necessarily have two propellers.

Question 9.
If the polar ice caps of the earth were to melt, what would the effect of the length of the day be?
Answer:
Earth rotates about its polar axis. When ice of polar caps of earth melts, mass concen¬trated near the axis of rotation spreads out. Therefore, moment of inertia ‘I’ increases.

As no external torque acts, L = Iω = I(\(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\)) = constant

with increase of I, T will increase i.e., length of the day will increase.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 10.
Why is it easier to balance a bicycle in motion?
Answer:
A bicycle in motion is in rotational equilibrium. From principles of Dynamics of rotational bodies is that the forces that are perpendicular to the axis of rotation will try to turn the axis of rotation but necessary forces will arise it cancel these forces due to inertia of rotation and fixed position of axis is maintained. So it is easy to balance a rotating body.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between centre of mass and centre of gravity. [AP Mar. 18, 17, 16, 15, 14, 13, May 17; June 15 : TS Mar. 16. 15, May 18, 17]
Answer:

Centre of mass Centre of gravity
1) A point inside a body at which the whole mass is supposed to be concentrated.
A force applied at this point produces translatory motion.
1) A point inside a body through which the weight of the body acts.
2) It pertains (or) contain to mass of the body. 2) It refers to weight acting on all particles of the body.
3) In case of small bodies centre of mass and centre of gravity coincide. (Uniform gravitational field) 3) In case of a huge body centre of mass and centre of gravity may not coincide. (Non uniform gravitational field)
4) Algebraic sum of moments of masses about centre of mass is zero. 4) Algebraic sum of moments of weights about centre of gravity is zero.
5) Centre of mass is used to study translatory motion of a body when it is in complicated motion. 5) Centre of gravity is used to know the stability of the body where it is to be supported.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 2.
Show that a system of particles moving under the influence of an external force, moves as if the force is applied at its centre of mass. [AP May ’18]
Answer:
Consider a system of particles of masses m1, m2, ……….. mn moves with velocity
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 1
But Force (F) = ma, so total force on the body is
F = MaC.M = m1a1 + m2a2 + m3a3 + ……….. + mn an
or Total Force F = MaC.M = F1 + F2 + F3 + ……… + Fn

Hence, total force on the body is the sum of forces on individual particles and it is equals to force on centre of mass of the body.

Question 3.
Explain about the centre of mass of earth-moon system and its rotation around the sun.
Answer:
The interaction of earth and moon does not effect the motion of centre of mass of earth and moon system around the sun. The gravitational force between earth and moon is internal force. Internal forces cannot change the position of centre of mass.

The external force acting on the centre of mass of earth and moon system is force between the sun and C.M. of earth, moon system. Motion of centre of mass depends on external force. Hence, earth moon system continues to move in an elliptical path around the sun. It is irrespective of rotation of moon around earth.

Question 4.
Define vector product. Explain the properties of a vector product with two examples. [AP Mar. ’17, ’15 ; TS Mar. ’17, ’16, ’15; APMay ’18. ’17; TS May ’18. ’16]
Answer:
Vector product (or) cross product :
If the product of two vectors (say \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\)) gives a vector then that multiplication of vectors is called cross product or vector product of vectors.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 2

Properties of cross product:
1. Cross product is not commutative i.e.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 3
2. Cross product obeys distributive law i.e.,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 4
3. If any vector is represented by the combination of \(\overline{\mathrm{i}},\overline{\mathrm{j}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{k}}\) then cross product will obey right hand screw rule.
4. The product of two coplanar perpendicular unit vectors will generate a unit vector perpendicular to that plane
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 5
5. Cross product of parallel vectors is zero
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 6

Examples of cross product:
1) Torque (or) moment of force (\(\overline{\mathrm{\tau}}\)) :
It is defined as the product of force and perpendicular distance from the point of application.
∴ Torque τ = \(\overline{\mathrm{r}}\times\overline{\mathrm{F}}\)

2) Angular momentum and angular velocity :
For a rigid body in motion, Angular momentum (\(\overline{\mathrm{L}}\)) = radius (\(\overline{\mathrm{r}}\)) x momentum (\(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\))
∴ Angular momentum (\(\overline{\mathrm{L}}\)) = \(\overline{\mathrm{r}}\) × (m\(\overline{\mathrm{v}}\)) = m(\(\overline{\mathrm{r}}\times\overline{\mathrm{v}}\))

Question 5.
Define angular velocity. Derive v = r ω. [TS Mar. 19,’ 17, 16; AP Mar. 19, May. 16; May 14]
Answer:
Angular velocity (ω) :
Rate of change of angular displacement is called angular velocity.

Relation between linear velocity (v) and angular velocity (ω) :
Let a particle P is moving along circumference of a circle of radius r1 with uniform speed v. Let it is initially at the position A, during a small time ∆t it goes to a new position say C from B. Angle subtended during this small interval is say dθ.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 7

By definition angular velocity,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 8

Question 6.
State the principle of conservation of angular momentum. Give two examples.
Answer:
Law of conservation of angular momentum:
When no external torque is acting on a body then the angular momentum of that rota-ting body is constant.
i.e., I1ω1 = I2ω2 (when τ = 0)

Example -1:
A boy stands over the centre of a horizontal platform which is rotating freely with a speed ω1 (n1revolutions/sec.) about a vertical axis passing through the centre of the platform and straight up through the boy. He holds two bricks in each of his hands close to his body. The combined moment of inertia of the system is say I1. Let the boy stretches his arms to hold the masses far away from his body. In this position the moment of inertia increases to I2 and let ω2 is his angular speed.

Here ω2 < ω1 because moment of inertia increases.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 9

Example – 2 :
An athlete diving off a high spring board can bring his legs and hands close to the body and performs Somersault about a horizontal axis passing through his body in the air before reaching the water below it. During the fall his angular momentum remains constant.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 7.
Define angular acceleration and torque. Establish the relation between angular acceleration and torque. [TS Mar. ’18, ’17; TS May ’17, June ’15; AP Mar. ’19, June ’15]
Answer:
Angular acceleration (α) :
Rate of change of angular velocity is called angular acceleration.

Torque :
It is defined as the product of the force and the perpendicular distance of the point of application of the force from that point.

Relation between angular acceleration and Torque:
We know that, L = Iω

On differentiating the above expression with respect to time ‘t’
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 10

But \(\frac{dL}{dt}\) is the rate of change of angular momentum called ‘Torque (τ)”.

and \(\frac{d \omega}{dt}\) is the rate of change of angular velocity called “angular acceleration (α)”

∴ The relation between Torque and angular acceleration is, τ = lα

Question 8.
Write the equations of motion for a particle rotating about a fixed axis.
Answer:
Equations of rotational kinematics :
If ‘θ’ is the angular displacement, Wj is the initial angular velocity, ωf is the final angular velocity after a time ‘t’ seconds and ‘α’ is the angular acceleration, then the equations of rotational kinematics can be written as,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 11

Question 9.
Derive expressions for the final velocity and total energy of a body rolling without slipping.
Answer:
A rolling body has both translational kinetic energy and rotational kinetic energy. So the total K.E energy of a rolling body is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 12

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
(a) State and prove parallel axis theorem.
(b) For a thin flat circular disk, the radius of gyration about a diameter as axis is k. If the disk is cut along a diameter AB as shown into two equal pieces, then find the radius of gyration of each piece about AB.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 13
Answer:
a) Parallel axis theorem :
The moment of inertia of a rigid body about an axis passing through a point is the sum of moment of inertia about parallel axis passing through centre of mass (IG) and mass of the body multiplied by Square of distance (MR²) between the axes i.e.,
I = IG + MR²

Proof :
Consider a rigid body of mass M with ‘G’ as its centre of mass. Iq the moment of inertia about an axis passing through centre of mass. I = The moment of inertia about an axis passing through the point ’O’ in that plane.

Let perpendicular distance between the axes is OG = R (say)

Consider point P in the given plane. Join OP and GP. Extend the line OG and drop a normal from ’P’ on to it as shown in figure.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 14

The moment of inertia about the axis passing through centre of mass G.
(IG) = ∑mGP² ……….. (1)

M.O.I. of the body about an axis passing through ‘O’ (I) = ∑mOP² ………… (2)
From triangle OPD
OP² = OD² + DP²
⇒ OD = OG + GD
∴ OD² = (OG + GD)² = OG² + GD² + 2OG. GD ………….. (3)
From Equations (2) and (3)
I = ∑mOP² = Em [ (OG² + GD² + 2OG. GD) + DP²]
∴ I = ∑m {GD² + DP² + OG² + 20G. GN}
But GD² + DP² = GP²
∴ I = ∑m {GP² + OG² + 20G. GD}
∴ I = ∑m GP² + ∑mOG² + 20G ∑mGD ………. (4)

But the terms ∑mGP² = IG
∑mOG² = MR² (∵ ∑m = M and OG = R)
The term 20G ∑mGD = 0. Because it represents sum of moment of masses about centre of mass. Hence its value is zero.
∴ I = IG + MR²

Hence parallel axis theorem is proved.

b) Moment of inertia of a disc of mass ‘M’ and radius ‘R’ about its diameter is,
I = \(\frac{MR^2}{4}\)

If ‘k’ is radius of gyration of disc then, I = Mk²
∴ Mk² = \(\frac{MR^2}{4}\) ⇒ k = R/2

After cutting along the diameter, mass M of each piece = \(\frac{M}{2}\)
Moment of inertia of each piece,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 15

Question 2.
(a) State and prove perpendicular axis theorem.
(b) If a thin circular ring and a thin flat circular disk of same mass have same moment of inertia about their respective diameters as axis. Then find the ratio of their radii.
Answer:
a) Perpendicular axis theorem :
The moment of inertia of a plane lamina about an axis perpendicular to its plane is equal to the sum of the moment of inertia about two perpendicular axis concurrent with perpendicular axis and lying in the plane of the body.
∴ Iz = Ix + Iy

Proof :
Consider a rectangular plane lamina. X and Y are two mutually perpendicular axis in the plane. Choose another perpendicular axis Z passing through the point ‘O’.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 16

Consider a particle P in XOY plane.
Its co-ordinates are (x, y).
Moment of inertia of particle about
X-axis is IX = ∑my².
M.O.I about Y-axis is IY = ∑mx²
M.O.I about Z axis is IZ = ∑ m . OP²
From triangle OAP,
OP² = OA² + AP² = y² + x²
∴ Iz = ∑ mOP² = ∑ m (y² + x²)
∴ Iz = X my² + ∑ mx²
But ∑ my² = Ix and ∑ mx² = Iy

∴ Moment of Inertia about a perpendicular axis passing through ‘O’ is IZ = IX + IY
Hence perpendicular axis theorem is proved.

b) Moment of inertia of a thin circular ring about its diameter is, I1 = m11

Moment of inertia of a flat circular disc about its diameter is, I2 = \(\frac{m_2R^{2}_{2}}{2}\)
Given that two objects having same moment of inertia i.e., I1 = I2

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 17

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 3.
State and prove the principle of conservation of angular momentum. Explain the principle of conservation of angular momentum with examples. [AP Mar. ’16]
Answer:
Law of conservation of angular momentum: When no external torque is acting on a body then the angular momentum of that rotating body is constant.
i.e., I1ω1 = I2ω2 (when τ = 0)

Explanation:
Here I1 and I2 are moment of inertia of rotating bodies and ω1 and ω2 are their initial and final angular velocities. If
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 18

Example -1 :
A boy stands over the centre of a horizontal platform which is rotating freely with a speed ω1 (n1 revolutions/sec.) about a vertical axis passing through the centre of the platform and straight up through the boy. He holds two bricks in each of his hands close to his body. The combined moment of inertia of the system is say I1. Let the boy stretches his arms to hold the masses far away from his body. In this position the moment of inertia increases to I2 and let ω2 is his angular speed.

Here ω2 < ω1 because moment of inertia increases.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 19

Example – 2 :
An athlete diving off a high spring board can bring his legs and hands close to the body and performs Somersault about a horizontal axis passing through his body in the air before reaching the water below it. During the fall his angular momentum remains constant.

Position of centre of mass of some symmetrical bodies :

Shape of the body Position of centre of mass
1. Hollow sphere (or) solid sphere At the centre of sphere
2. Circular ring At the centre of the ring
3. Circular disc At the centre of disc
4. Triangular plate At the centroid
5. Square plate At the point of intersection of diagonals
6. Rectangular plate At the point of intersection of diagonals
7. Cone At \(\frac{3h}{4}\) th of its height from its apex on its own axis
8. Cylinder At the midpoint of its own axis.

Comparison of translatory and rotatory motions :
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 20

Problems

Question 1.
Show that a • (b × c) is equal in magnitude to the volume of the parallelopiped formed on the three vectors a, b and c. (IMP)
Solution:
Let a parallelopiped be formed on three
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 21
Now \(\hat{a}\) • (\(\hat{b}\times\hat{c}\) x c) = \(\hat{a}\) • be \(\hat{n}\) = (a) (be) cos 0° – abc

Which is equal in magnitude to the volume of parallelopiped.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 2.
A rope of negligible mass is wound round a hollow cylinder of mass 3 kg and radius 40 cm. What is the angular acceleration of the cylinder if the rope is pulled with a force of 30 N? What is the linear acceleration of the rope ? Assume that there is no slipping.
Soution:
Here M = 3 kg ; R = 40 cm = 0.4 m
Moment of inertia of the hollow cylinder about its axis, I = MR² = 3(0.4)² = 0.48 kg m²
Force applied, F = 30 N
∴ Torque, τ = F × R = 30 × 0.4 = 12 N – m

If α is angular acceleration produced, then from τ = Iα
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 22
Linear acceleration, a = Ra = 0.4 × 25
= 10 ms-2.

Question 3.
A coin is kept a distance of 10 cm from the centre of a circular turn table. If the coefficient of static friction between the table and the coin is 0.8. Find the frequency or rotation of the disc at which the coin will just begin to slip.
Solution:
Distance of coin = r = 10 cm = 0.1 m.
Coefficient of friction µ = 0.8.
Frequency of rotation = number of rotations per second.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 23

Question 4.
Find the torque of a force \(\mathbf{7} \overrightarrow{\mathbf{i}}+\mathbf{3} \overrightarrow{\mathbf{j}}-5 \overrightarrow{\mathbf{k}}\) about the origin. The force acts on a particle whose position vector is \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{i}}-\overrightarrow{\mathbf{j}}+\overrightarrow{\mathbf{k}}\). [AP Mar. ’14, ’13; May ’13]
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 24
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 25

Question 5.
Particles of masses 1g, 2g, 3g….., 100g are kept at the marks 1 cm, 2 cm, 3 cm…, 100 cm respectively on a meter scale. Find the moment of inertia of the system of particles about a perpendicular bisector of the meter scale.
Solution:
Given Masses of 1g, 2g, 3g 100 g are 1, 2, 3 ……….. 100 cm on a scale.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 26
i) Sum of masses 2m = \(\sum_{i=1}^n\)ni
Sum of n natural numbers S
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 27
∴ Total mass M = 5051 gr = 5.051 kg → (1)

ii) Centre of mass of all these masses is given by
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 28

iii) M.O.I. = I
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 29
Sum of cubes of 1st n natural numbers is
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 30

M.O.I. about C.M. = IG = I – MR²
= 2.550 – 5.05 × 0.67 × 0.67 = 2.550 – 2.267 = 0.283 kg.m2

iv) Perpendicular bisector is at 50 CM.
So shift M.O.I from centre of mass to
x1 = 50cm point from x = 67 CM
∴ Distance between the axis
R = 67 – 50 = 17cm = 0.17M
M.O.I. about this axis I = IG + MR²
= 0.283 + 5.05 × 0.17 × 0.17
= 0.283 + 0.146 = 0.429 kgm²
∴ M.O.I. about perpendicular bisector of scale = 0.429 kg – m²

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 6.
Calculate the moment of inertia of a fly wheel, if its angular velocity is increased from 60 r.p.m. to 180 r.p.m. when 100 J of work is done on it. [TS May ’16]
Solution:
W = 100 J, ω1 = 60 RPM = 1 R.P.S = 2π Rad.
ω2 = 180 R.P.M. = 3 R.P.S = 6π Rad.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 31

Question 7.
Three particles each of mass 100 g are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side length 10 cm. Find the moment of inertia of the system about an axis passing through the centroid of the triangle and perpendicular to its plane.
Solution:
Mass of each particle m = 100 g; side of equilateral triangle = 10 cm.
In equilateral triangle height of angular bisector CD = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)l
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 32

Centroid will divide the angular bisector in a ratio 2 : 1

So X distance of each mass from vertex to centroid is 2.\(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)l = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)l
Moment of Inertia of the system
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 33

Question 8.
Four particles each of mass 100g are placed at the corners of a square of side 10 cm. Find the moment of inertia of the system about an axis passing through the centre of the square and perpendicular to its plane. Find also the radius of gyration of the system.
Solution:
Mass of each particle, m = 100 g = 0.1 kg.
Length of side’of square, a = 10 cm = 0.1 m
In square distance of corner from centre of square = \(\frac{1}{2}\) diagonal = \(\frac{\sqrt{2}a}{2}=\frac{a}{\sqrt{2}}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 34
∴ Total moment of Inertia
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 35

Question 9.
Two uniform circular discs, each of mass 1 kg and radius 20 cm, are kept in contact about the tangent passing through the point of contact. Find the moment of inertia of the system about the tangent passing through the point of contact.
Solution:
Mass of disc = M = 1 kg.
Radius of disc = 20 cm = 0.2 m
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 36
They are in contact as shown.
M.O.I of a circular disc about a tangent parallel to its plane = \(\frac{5}{4}\) MR²
Total M.O.I. of the system
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 37

Question 10.
Four spheres each diameter 2a and mass ‘m’ are placed with their centres on the four corners of a square of the side b. Calculate the moment of inertia of the system about any side of the square.
Solution:
Diameter of sphere = 2a ⇒ radius = a.
Side of square = b.
For spheres 1 and 2 axis of rotation is same and passing through diameters. M.O.I. of solid sphere about any diameter = \(\frac{2}{5}\)MR² (put M = m and R = a)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 38

Transfer this M.O.I. on to the axis using
Parallel axis theorem.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 39
Total M.O.I. of the system
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 40

Question 11.
To maintain a rotor at a uniform angular speed or 200 rad s-1, an engine needs to transmit a torque of 180 Nm. What is the power required by the engine? (Note : uniform angular velocity in the absence of friction implies zero torque. In practice, applied torque is needed to counter frictional torque). Assume that the engine is 100% efficient.
Solution:
Given uniform angular speed (ω) = 200 rad s-1
Torque, τ = 180 N – m ; But power p = τω
∴ P =180 × 200 = 36000 watt = 36 kW

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 12.
A metre stick is balanced on a knife edge at its centre. When two coins, each of mass 5g are put one on top of the other at the 12.0 cm mark, the stick is found to be balanced at 45.0 cm. What is the mass of the metre stick?
Solution:
Let m be the mass of the stick concentrated at C, the 50 cm mark
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 41
For equilibrium
about C’, i.e. at the 45 cm mark,
10g (45 – 12) = mg (50 – 45)
10g × 33 = mg × 5
m = \(\frac{10\times33}{5}\) = 66 grams

Question 13.
Determine the kinetic energy of a circular disc rotating with a speed of 60 rpm about an axis passing through a point on its circumference and perpendicular to its plane. The circular disc has a mass of 5 kg and radius 1 m.
Solution:
Mass of disc, M = 5 kg; Radius R = 1 m.
Angular velocity, co = 60 RPM = \(\frac{60\times 2\pi}{60}\) = 2πRad/sec

M.O.I. of disc about a point passing through circumference and perpendicular to the plane.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 42

Question 14.
Two particles, each of mass m and speed u, travel in opposite directions along para¬llel lines separated by a distance d. Show that the vector angular momentum of the two particle system is the same whatever be the point about which the angular momemtum is taken.
Solution:
Angular momentum, L = mvr
Choose any axis say ‘A’
Let at any given time distance between m1 & m2 = L = L1 + L2
About the axis ‘A’ both will rotate in same direction See fig.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 43
∴ Total angular momentum
L = L1 + L2 = muL1 + muL2 = mu (L1 + L2) = muL

about any new axis say B distance of m1 and m2
are say L’1 and L’2
Total angular momentum,
L = mu L’1 + mu L’2
or L = mu(L’1 + L’2) = muL (∵ L’1 + L’2 = L)
Hence, total angular momentum of the system is always constant.

Question 15.
The moment of inertia of a fly wheel making 300 revolutions per minute is 0.3 kgm². Find the torque required to bring it to rest in 20s.
Solution:
M.O.I, I = 0.3 kg. ; time, t = 20 sec.,
ω1 = 300 R.P.M. = \(\frac{300}{60}\) = 5. R.P.S.; ω2 = 0

Torque, τ = Iα = 0.3 × \(\frac{5\times 2\pi}{20}\) = 0.471 N – m.

Question 16.
When 100J of work is done on a fly wheel, its angular velocity is increased from 60 rpm to 180 rpm. What is the moment of inertia of the wheel?
Solution:
W=100J, ω1 = 60 RPM = 1 R.PS = 2π Rad.
ω2 =180 R.P.M. = 3 R.P.S = 6π Rad.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 44

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion

Question 17.
Find the centre of mass of three particles at the vertices of an equilateral triangle. The masses of the particles are lOOg, 150g and 200g respectively. Each side of the equilateral triangle is 0.5 m long, lOOg mass is at origin and 150g mass is on the X-axis. [TS Mar. 18, June 15; AP Mar. ’18]
Solution:
Mass at A = 100g ; Coordinates = 0, 0
Mass at B = 150 g; Coordinates = (0.5, 0)
Mass at C = 200g; Coordinates (0.25,0.25 √3 )
Coordinates xcm
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 7 Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion 45

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 2nd Lesson Solutions Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 2nd Lesson Solutions

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Define the term solution.
Answer:
Homogeneous mixture of two or more than two components is called solution.

Question 2.
Define molarity.
Answer:
Molarity (M) is defined as number of moles of solute dissolved in one litre of (or one cubic decimetre) solution.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 1

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 3.
Define molality.
Answer:
Molality (m) is defined as the number of moles of the solute present in one kilogram (kg) of the solvent.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 2

Question 4.
Give an example of a solid solution in which the solute is solid.
Answer:
In solid solution solute is solid. Here sol-vent is also solid. e.g., copper dissolved in gold (alloys).

Question 5.
Define mole fraction. (Mar. 2018 TS)
Answer:
Mole fraction is the ratio of number of moles of one component to the total number of moles of all the components in the solution.
Mole fraction of a component
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 3

Question 6.
Define mass percentage solution.
Answer:
The mass percentage of a component of a solution is defined as
Mass % of a component
Mass % of the component
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 4

Question 7.
What is ppm of a solution ?
Answer:
Parts per million
Number of parts of the
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 5
This method is convenient when a solute is present in trace amounts.

Question 8.
What role do the molecular interactions play in a solution of alcohol and water ?
Answer:
The interaction between alcohol and alcohol is hydrogen bonding and H2O and H2O is also hydrogen bonding. After mixing the interaction between alcohol and H2O is also hydrogen bonding but less than the hydrogen bonding in alcohol and H2O separately. So after mixing the interaction between alcohol and water decreases and the vapour pressure of solution increases forming low boiling point azeotrope.

Question 9.
State Raoult’s law. (AP & TS 16) (IPE 14) (Mar. 2018 . AP & TS)
Answer:
For any solution the partial vapour pressure of each volatile component in the solution is directly proportional to its mole fraction.

Question 10.
State Henry’s law.
Answer:
The solubility of a gas in a liquid is directly proportional to the partial pressure of the gas present above the surface of liquid or solution.
(or)
Mole fraction of gas in the solution is proportional to the partial pressure of the gas over the solution.
(or)
The partial pressure of the gas in vapour phase (p) is proportional to the mole fraction of the gas (x) in the solution.
P = KH × x
KH is the Henry’s law constant.

Question 11.
What is Ebullioscopic constant?
Answer:
The elevation in the boiling point of one molal solution i.e., when one mole of solute is dissolved in 1 kg of solvent, is called boiling point elevation constant or molal elevation constant or ebullioscopic constant.
ΔTb = Kb m.
unit of Kb = K kg mol-1

Question 12.
What is Cryoscopic constant?
Answer:
The depression in freezing point of one molal solution i.e., when one mole of solute is dissolved in 1 kg of solvent, is called freezing point depression constant or molal depression constant or cryoscopic constant.
ΔTf = Kf m.
unit of Kf = K kg mol-1

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 13.
Define Osmotic pressure. (AP 16, 15) (Mar. 2018 – AP)
Answer:
When a solution is separated from a solvent by a semipermeable membrane or if a dilute solution is separated from concentrated solution by a semipermeable membrane, the pressure that just prevents passage of solvent into solution or solvent from dilute solution into concentrated solution is called osmotic pressure.
(or)
The extra pressure that is to be applied on the solution side when the solution and solvent are separated by a semipermeable membrane to stop osmosis.

Question 14.
What are isotonic solutions ? TS Mar. 19; (AP 17, 15; TS 16)
Answer:
Two solutions having same osmotic pressure at a given temperature are called isotonic solutions.

Question 15.
Amongst the following compounds, identify which are insoluble, partially soluble and highly soluble in water,
(i) Phenol
(ii) Toluene
(iii) Formic acid
(iv) Ethylene glycol
(v) Chloroform
(vi) Pentanol.
Answer:
Insoluble : Chloroform, toluene.
Partially soluble : Phenol, pentanol.
Highly soluble: Formic acid, ethylene glycol.

Question 16.
Calculate the mass percentage of aspirin (C9H8O4) in acetonitrile (CH3CN) when 6.5 gm of C9H8O4 is dissolved in 450g of CH3CN.
Answer:
Mass percentage of aspirin.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 6

Question 17.
Calculate the amount of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) required for preparing 250ml of 0.15M solution in methanol.
Answer:
Molecular mass of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) = 12 × 6 + 5 + 12 + 32 + 1 = 122 g mol-1
moles of benzoic = M × V
= 250 × 0.15 = 37.5
= 37.5 × 10-3 mol
Amount of benzoic acid = Moles × MW2
= 37.5 × 10-3 × 122
= 4.575 g.

Question 18.
The depression in freezing point of water observed for the same amount of acetic acid, dichloro – acetic acid and trichloro acetic acid increases in the order given above. Explain briefly.
Answer:
Increasing order of ΔTf (depression in freezing point) is Acetic acid < dichloroacetic acid < trichloroacetic acid.
Due to more electronegativity of Cl atom it exerts -1 (inductive effect) consequently dichloroacetic acid is the stronger acid than acetic acid. As the number of chlorine atoms increases the inductive effect also increases. Hence trichloro acetic acid is stronger acid than dichloroacetic acid.

Question 19.
What is van’t Hoffs factor ‘i’ and how is it related to ‘α’ in the case of a binary ele-ctrolyte (1 : 1) ?
Answer:
van’t Hoff introduced a factor ‘i’ known as the van’t Hoff factor to account the extent of dissociation or association. The factor ‘i’ is defined as
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 7
If α represents the degree of association of the solute for an equilibrium.
nA \(\rightleftharpoons\) An
Total number of particles at equilibrium is 1 – α + \(\frac{\alpha}{2}\) = 1 – \(\frac{\alpha}{2}\)
Then i = \(\frac{\alpha / 2}{1 \cdot 1}\) = \(\frac{\alpha}{2}\)
For dissociation
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 8
Total moles of particles aren(1 – α + α + α)
= n(1 + α)
i = \(\frac{n(1+\alpha)}{n}\) = 1 + α

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 20.
What is relative lowering of vapour pressure ? (AP Mar. 19)
Answer:
The ratio of the lowering of vapour pressure of a solution containing a non – volatile solute to the vapour pressure of pure solvent is called relative lowering of vapour pressure.
It can be shown as R.L.V.P. = \(\frac{p^{\circ}-p}{p^{\circ}}\)
Here p° is the vapour pressure of pure solvent, p is the vapour pressure of solution containing non – volatile solute.

Question 21.
Calculate the mole fraction of H2SO4 in a solution containing 98% H2SO4 by mass. (Mar. 2018 – TS)(IPE 14)
Answer:
Mass of water = 2 gm.
Moles of water = \(\frac{2}{18}\) = \(\frac{1}{9}\) (M.Wt. of H2O = 18)
Mass of H2SO4 = 98 gm.
Moles of H2SO4 = \(\frac{98}{98}\)
= 1 (Mol. Wt. of H2SO4 = 98)
Moles fraction of H2SO4 = \(\frac{1}{1+\frac{1}{9}}\) = \(\frac{9}{10}\) = 0.9

Question 22.
How many types of solutions are formed ? Give an example for each type of solution.
Answer:
Depending on the type of solvent three types of solutions will be formed.

Type of Solution Solute Solvent Common Examples
Gaseous Solutions Gas
Liquid
Solid
Gas
Gas
Gas
Mixture of oxygen and nitrogen gases
Chloroform mixed with nitrogen gas
Camphor in nitrogen gas.
Liquid Solutions Gas
Liquid
Solid
Liquid
Liquid
Liquid
Oxygen dissolved in water.
Ethanol dissolved in water.
Glucose dissolved in water.
Solid Solutions Gas
Liquid
Solid
Solid
Solid
Solid
Solutions of hydrogen in palladium.
Amalgam of mercury with sodium.
Copper dissolved in gold.

 

Question 23.
Define mass percentage, volume percentage and mass to volume percentage solutions.
Answer:
Mass percentage (w/w) : The mass percentage of a component of a solution is defined as
Mass % of a component
Mass of the component
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 9
Volume percentage (V/V) : The volume percentage is defined as
Volume % of a component
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 10
Mass to volume percentage (w/v): It is the mass of solute dissolved in 100 ml of the solution.

Question 24.
Concentrated nitric acid used in the laboratory work is 68% nitric acid by in aqueous solution. What should be the molarity of such a sample of the acid if the density of the solution is 1.504 g mL-1?
Answer:
68% by mass implies that 68 g of HNO3 is present in 100 g of solution.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 11

Question 25.
A solution of glucose in water is labelled as 10% w/w. What would be the molarity of the solution?
Answer:
Wt. of glucose = 1o g
Wt. of solution = 100 gm
Wt. of water = 100 – 10 = 90 gm.
Considering density of water as 1 gm mL-1
Volume of water = 90 mL
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 12

Question 26.
A solution of sucrose In water is labelled as 20% w/w. What would be the mole fraction of each component in the solution?
Answer:
Wt. of sucrose = 20
Moles of sucrose = \(\frac{20}{342}\) = 0.0585
Wt. of solution = 100 g
Wt. of water = 100 – 20 = 80 g
Moles of water = \(\frac{80}{18}\) = 4.44
Mole fraction of sucrose = \(\frac{0.0585}{0.0585+4.44}\)
= 0.013
Mole fraction of water = \(\frac{4.44}{0.0585+4.44}\)
= 0.987

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 27.
How many ml of 0.1 MHCl is required to react completely with 1.0 g mixture of Na2CO3 and NaHCO3 containing equimolar amounts of both ?
Answer:
Let Na2CO3 be x g
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 13
Since, given mixture contains equimolar amount.
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{106}\) = \(\frac{1-x}{84}\) (or) x = 0.56
Total HCl required
= \(\left[\frac{2 x}{106}+\frac{1-x}{84}\right]\) = \(\frac{2 \times 0.56}{106}\) + \(\frac{1-0.56}{84}\)
= 0.01578 mol
If V is the volume of HCl required, then
V(L) × 0.1 = 0.01578
(or) V(L) = 0.1578L (or) 157.8 mL.

Question 28.
A solution is obtained by mixing 300g of 25% solution and 400g of 40% solution by mass. Calculate the mass percentage of the resulting solution.
Answer:
Mass of solute in 300 g of 25% solution.
= \(\frac{300 \times 25}{100}\) = 75 g
Mass of solute in 400 g of 40% solution
= \(\frac{400 \times 40}{100}\) = 160 g
Total mass of solute = 75 + 160 = 235 g
Total mass of solution = 700 g
% solute in final solution = \(\frac{235 \times 100}{700}\)
= 33.5%
% of water in final solution = 100 – 33.5
= 66.5%

Question 29.
An antifreeze solution is prepared from 222.6g of ethylene glycol (C6H6O2) and 200g of water (solvent). Calculate the molality of the solution.
Answer:
Mass of glycol (w1) = 222.6 g
Moles of glycol (n1)

= TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 14
= \(\frac{222.6}{62}\)
= 3.59 mol
Mass of water (w2) = 200 g = \(\frac{200 \times 1 \mathrm{~kg}}{1000}\)
= 0.2 kg
Mass of solution (w1 + w2) = 200 + 222.6
= 422.6 g
Density of solution (d) = 1.072 g mL-1
Volume of solution (V)
= TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 15
= \(\frac{422.6}{1.072}\)
= 394.22 mL (or) 0.3942 L
Molality (m) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_1}{\mathrm{w}_2 \mathrm{~kg}}\) = \(\frac{3.59 \mathrm{~mol}}{0.2 \mathrm{~kg}}\)
= 17.95 mol kg
Molarity (M) = \(\frac{n_1}{V \text { in lit }}\) = \(\frac{3.59}{0.3942}\) = 9.1 mol L-1

Question 30.
Why do gases always tend to be less soluble in liquids as the temperature is raised ?
Answer:
Dissolution of gases is exothermic process. It is because dissolution of a gas in a liquid decreases the entropy (ΔS < 0). Thus increase of temperature tends to push the equilibrium (Gas + solvent \(\rightleftharpoons\) solution, ΔH = -Ve) in the backward direction, thereby, suppressing the dissolution.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 31.
What is meant by positive deviations from Raoult’s law and how is the sign of Δmix H related to positive deviation from Raoult’s law ?
Answer:
The solutions which do not obey Raoult’s law and are accompanied by change in enthalpy and change in volume during their formation are called non – ideal solutions.

In the solutions showing positive deviations the partial vapour pressure of each component (say A and B) of solution is greater them the vapour pressure as expected according to Raoult’s law. In this type of solutions the solvent – solvent and solute – solute interactions are stronger than solvent – solute interactions since in the solution, the interactions among molecules become weaker, their escaping tendency increases which results in the increase in their partial vapour pressures. In such solutions total vapour pressure of the solution is also greater than the vapour pressure required according to the Raoult’s law.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 16
For this type of non – ideal solutions exhibiting positive deviations.

  1. PA < \(P_A^0 x_A\); PB > \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{B}}^0 \mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{B}}\)
  2. ΔmixH = +ve
  3. ΔmixV = +ve

Question 32.
What is meant by negative deviation from Raoult’s law and how is the sign of ΔmixH related to negative deviation from Raoult’s law?
Answer:
The solutions which do not obey Raoult’s law and are accompanied by change in enthalpy and change in volume during their formation are called non – Ideal solutions. In the solutions showing negative deviations the partial vapour pressure of each component of solution is less than the vapour pressure as expected according to Raoult’s law. In this type of solutions solvent – solvent and solute – solute interactiòns are weaker than that of solvent – solute interactions.

So the interactions among molecules in solution become stronger. Hence the escaping tendency of molecules decrease which results in the decrease in their partial vapour pressure. In such solutions total vapour pressure of the solution is also less than the vapour pressure expected according to Raoult’s law.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 17

For these solutions exhibiting negative deviations

  1. TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 39
  2. Δmix H = -ve
  3. ΔmixV = -ve

Question 33.
The vapour pressure of water is 12.3 k Pa at 300K. Calculate the vapour pressure of 1 molar solution of a non – volatile solute in it.
Answer:
Vapour pressure of water \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{H}_2}^0 \mathrm{O}\) 12.3 k Pa
In 1 molar solution
Moles of water nH2O = \(\frac{1000}{18}\) = 55.5 mol
Moles of solute nB = 1 mol
Mole fraction of H2O (XH2O) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}+\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
= \(\frac{55.5}{55.5+1}\) = 0.982
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 40

Question 34.
Calculate the mass of a non – volatile solute (molar mass 40g mol-1) which should be dissolved in 114g Octane to reduce its vapour pressure to 80%. (TS 16; IF’ 14)
Answer:
Vapour pressure of solution (p) = 80% of \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\) = 0.8\(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\)
Let the mass of solute be w g
∴ Moles of solute nB = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}}}\) = \(\frac{W}{40}\) mol
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 41

Question 35.
A 5% solution (by mass) of cane sugar in water has freezing point of 271K. Calculate the freezing point of 5% glucose in water If freezing point of water is 273.15K.
Answer:
Molarity of sugar solution (m) = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
(or) m = \(\frac{5 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{342 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 95 \mathrm{~g}}\) = 0.154 mol kg-1
ΔTf = 273.15 – 271 = 2.15°
Now ΔTf = Kf × m or Kf = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}}}{\mathrm{m}}\) = \(\frac{2.15}{0.154}\) = 13.96
Molailty of glucose solution (m)
= \(\frac{5 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{180 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 95 \mathrm{~g}}\) = 0.292 mol kg-1
ΔTf = Kfm= 13.96 × 0.292 = 4.08°
Freezing point of glucose solution
= 273.15 – 4.08 = 269.07 K.

Question 36.
If the osmotic pressure of glucose solution is 1.52 bar at 300K. What would be its concentration if R = 0.083L bar mol-1 K-1?
Answer:
Temperature T = 300 K
Osmotic pressure = 1.52 bar
R = 0.083 L bar mol-1 K-1
π = CRT (or) C = \(\frac{\pi}{\mathrm{RT}}\)
= \(\frac{1.52 \mathrm{bar}}{0.083 \mathrm{~L} \mathrm{bar} \mathrm{mol}^{-1} \mathrm{~K}^{-1} \times 300}\)
∴ = 0.061 mol L-1

Question 37.
Vapour pressure of water at 293K is 17.535mm Hg. Calculate the vapour pressure of the solution at 293K when 25g of glucose is dissolved in 450 g of water. (AP Mar. 19)
Answer:
Vapour pressure of water \(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}^{\mathrm{O}}\) = 17.535 mm.
Let vapour pressure of solution be ps
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 18

Question 38.
How is molar mass related to the elevation in boiling point of a solution ?
Answer:
To calculate the molar mass of an unknown non – volatile compound a known mass (say WBg) of it is dissolved in a known mass (say WA g) of some suitable solvent and elevation in its boiling point (ΔTb) is determined. Let MB be the molar mass of the compound. Then
Molarity of solution m = \(\frac{W_B}{M_B} \times \frac{1000}{W_A}\)
We know, ΔTb = Kb × m = Kb × \(\frac{W_B}{W_A}\) × \(\frac{1000}{M_B}\)
MB = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{b}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{~W}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{b}}}\)
Knowing Kb, WB, WA and the molar mass of the compound can be calculated
from the above relation. This method is known as ebullioscopic method.

Question 39.
What is an Ideal solution?
Answer:
An ideal solution may be defined as the solution which obeys Raoults law over the entire range of concentration and temperature.

According to Raoult’s law, the vapour pressure of a volatile component (pA) of the solutions is equal to the product of its mole fraction (xA) in solution and vapour pressure in pure state \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\).
PA = \(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0 \mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{A}}\)

The formation of ideal solution neither involve any change in enthalpy nor in volume. An ideal solution,

  1. should obey Raoults law i.e., pA = \(p_A^0 x_A\) and pB = \(p_B^0 x_B\)
  2. ΔmixH = 0
  3. ΔmixV = 0

In ideal solutions the solvent – solvent and solute – solute interactions are almost the same type as solvent – solute interactions.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 40.
What is relative lowering of vapour pressure ? How is it useful to determine the molar mass of a solute ?
Answer:
When a non – volatile solute such as urea, glucose etc., is dissolved in a volatile solvent such as water, the vapour pressure of solution will be less than that of pure solvent. This is known as lowering of vapour pressure.

The ratio of lowering of vapour pressure to that vapour pressure of pure solvent is known as relative lowering of vapour pressure.
\(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{p}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0}\) = Relative lowering of vapour pressure
Δp = \(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0-\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}\) = lowering of vapour pressure
\(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\) = vapour pressure of pure solvent

Determination of molar mass of a solute:
According to Raoult’s law the relative lowering of vapour pressure i equal to the mole fraction of the solute.
\(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{p}}{\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0}\) = xB
xB = mole fraction of solute,

If a known mass (WB) of the solute is dissolved in a known mass (WA) of solvent to prepare a dilute solution and the relative lowering of vapour pressure Is determined experimentally the molar mass of solvent (MA) is known, the molar mass of solute MB can be determined as follows.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 19
In this equation all the parameters except MB are known and hence MB can be calculated.

Question 41.
How is molar mass related to the depre-ssion in freezing point of a solution ?
Answer:
To determine the molar mass of an unknown non – volatile compound a known mass (say WBg) of it is dissolved in a known mass (say WAg) of some suitable solvent and depression in the freezing point (ΔTf) is determined. Let MB be the molar mass of the compound. Then
Molarity of the solution m = \(\frac{W_B}{M_B} \times \frac{1000}{W_A}\)
We know ΔTf = Kf × m = Kf × \(\frac{W_B}{W_A}\) × \(\frac{1000}{M_B}\)
MB = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{~W}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{f}}}\)
Knowing Kf, WB, WA and ΔTf, the molar mass of the compound can be calculated from the above relation. This method is called cryoscopic method.

Long Answer Questions (8 Marks)

Question 42.
An aqueous solution of 2% non – volatile solute exerts a pressure of 1.004 bar at the normal boiling point of the solvent. What is the molecular mass of the solute ?
Answer:
The vapour pressure of pure water
\(\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\) = 1 atm = 1.013 bar
Vapour pressure of solution (p) = 1.004 bar
WB = 2g = WA + WB = 100g; WA = 98g
Now \(\frac{\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0-\mathrm{P}}{\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{A}}}\) = \(\frac{W_B / M_B}{W_A / M_A}\)
or MB = \(\frac{W_B M_A}{W_A\left(\Delta P / P_A^0\right)}\) = \(\frac{2 \times 18 \times 1.013}{98 \times(1.013-1.004)}\)
= 41.35 g. mol-1

Question 43.
Heptane and Octane form an ideal solution. At 373K the vapour pressure of the two liquid components are 105.2 kPa and 46.8 kPa respectively. What will be the vapour pressure of a mixture of 26.0 g heptane and 35g of octane ?
Answer:
Moles of C7H16(nH) = \(\frac{W_{(H)}}{M_{(H)}}\) = \(\frac{25}{100}\) = 0.25 mol
Moles of C8H18 (nO) = \(\frac{W_{(0)}}{M_{(0)}}\) = \(\frac{35}{114}\) = 0.307 mol
Mole fraction of C7H16 = (XH) = \(\frac{0.25}{0.25+0.307}\)
= \(\frac{0.25}{0.557}\) = 0.466
Mole fraction of C8H18 (X0) = 1 – 0.449
= 0.534
Vapour pressure of heptane (pH)
\(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{H}}^{\mathrm{O}}\) × XH
= 105.2 \(\mathrm{Kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\) × 0.449
= 47.2348 \(\mathrm{Kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\) ≅ 49.02 \(\mathrm{kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\)
Vapour pressure of octane (PO)
= \(P_{\mathrm{H}}^O\) × XO
= 46.8 \(\mathrm{kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\) × 0.551 = 24.99 \(\mathrm{kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\)
Total vapour pressure PTotal = PH + PO
= 49.02 + 24.99 = 74.09 \(\mathrm{kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\)

Question 44.
A solution containing 30g of non – volatile solute exactly in 90g of water has a vapour pressure of 2.8 kPa at 298k. Further 18g of water is then added to the solution and the new vapour pressure becomes 2.9 \(\mathrm{kp}_{\mathrm{a}}\) at 298K. Calculate
(i) The molar mass of the solute and
(ii) Vapour pressure of water at 298k.
Answer:
Moles of solute (nB) = \(\frac{30}{M_B}\)
Moles of H2O(nH2O) = \(\frac{90}{18}\) = 5 mol
Mole fraction of H2O
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 20
After adding 18g(= 1 mol) of water to solution new mole fraction of water(\(\mathrm{X}_{\mathrm{H}_2 \mathrm{O}}^{\prime}\)) is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 21

Question 45.
Two elements A and B form compounds having formula AB2 and AB4. When dissolved in 20g of Benzene (C6H6), 1g of AB2 lowers the freezing point by 2.3K whereas 1.0g of AB4 lowers it by 1.3K. The molar depression constant for benzene is 5.1 K kg mol-1. Calculate atomic masses of A and B.
Answer:
We know
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 22
Let the atomic weight of A = x
Let the atomic weight of B = y
x + 2y = 110.86
x + 4y = 196.15
Solving for x and y, we get
y = 42.64, x = 25.58
∴ Atomic weight of A = 25.8 u
Atomic weight of B = 42.64 u

Question 46.
Calculate the depression In the freezing point of water when 10g of CH3CH2CHClCOOH is added to 250g of water. Ka = 1.4 × 10-3, Kf = 1.86K kg mol-1.
Answer:
Calculation of molarity of the solution:
Mass of the solution = 250 + 10 = 260 g
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 23

Calculation of van’t Hoffs factor (i) : Let degree of dissociation of acid be α since acid is monobasic acid, therefore α and Ka of acid are related as
α = \(\sqrt{K_{\mathrm{a}} / \mathrm{c}}\) = \(\sqrt{\frac{1.4 \times 10^{-3}}{0.284}}\) = 0.07
Van’t Hoff factor and degree of dissociation are related as
α = \(\frac{i-1}{m-1}\) = \(\frac{i-1}{2-1}\) or i = 1 + α = 1 + 0.07
(or) i = 0.7
Calculation of depression in freezing point ΔTf
ΔTf = i × Kf × m = \(\frac{1.07 \times 1.86 \times 10 \times 1000}{122.5 \times 250}\)
= 0.649 = 0.65°C

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 47.
19.5 g of CH2FCOOH is dissolved in 500g of water. The depression in freezing point of water observed is 1.0°C. Calculate the van’t Hoff factor and dissociation constant of fluoroacetic acid.
Answer:
Mass of solution = 500 + 19.5 = 519.5 g.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 24
Moles of CH2F COOH (nB) = \(\frac{W_B}{M_B}\) = \(\frac{19.5}{78}\)
= 0.25 mol
Molarity of solution (M) = \(\frac{n_B}{V_{(L)}}\) = \(\frac{0.25}{0.462}\)
= 0.541 moL-1
Mass of water (WA) = 500 g = 0.5 kg
Molarity of solution (m) = \(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{A}} \mathrm{kg}}\) = \(\frac{0.25 \mathrm{~mol}}{0.25 \mathrm{~kg}}\)
= 0.5 mol kg-1
ΔTf = i × Kf × m or i = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{b}}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{m}}\)
(or) i = \(\frac{1(\mathrm{~K})}{1.86 \mathrm{k} \mathrm{kg} \mathrm{mol}^{-1} \times 0.5 \mathrm{~mol} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}\)
= 1.0753
Each molecule of CH2F COOH dissociate into 2 particles as
CH2F COOH \(\rightleftharpoons\) CH2F COO + H+
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 25

Question 48.
100g of liquid A(molar mass 140g mol-1) was dissolved in 1000g of liquid B(molar mass 180g mol-1). The vapour pressure of pure liquid B was found to be 500 torr. Calculate the vapour pressure of pure liquid A and its vapour pressure in the solution if the total vapour pressure of the solution is 475 torr.
Answer:
Let vapour pressure of pure A be \(\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\)
\(p_{\mathrm{B}}^0\) = 500 torr ; nA = \(\frac{100}{140}\) = 0.714 mol
nB = \(\frac{1000}{180}\) = 5.55 mol
xA = \(\frac{0.714}{5.55+0.714}\) = 0.114
xB = 1 – 0.114 = 0.886
ptotal = \(p_A^0 x+p_B^0 x_B\)
(or) 475(torr) = \(p_A^0\) × 0.114 + 500 × 0.886
(or) \(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\) = 280.7 torr
PA = 280.70 × 0.114 = 32 Torr

Question 49.
Determine the amount of CaCl2 (i = 2.47) dissolved in 2.5 litre of water such that its osmotic pressure is 0.75 atm at 27°C.
Answer:
We know that π = CRT
or π = \(\frac{\mathrm{i} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{R} \times \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{L}}}\)
or WB = \(\frac{\pi \times M_B \times V_L}{i \times R \times T}\)
van’t Hoff factor i = 2.47
Osmotic pressure p = 0.75 atm.
temperature T = 273 + 27 = 300 K.
Mol. wt of CaCl2, MB = 111
Volume of solution = 2.5 L
Constant R = 0.0821 L atm mol-1 K-1
WB = \(\frac{0.75 \times 111 \times 2.5}{2.7 \times 0.0821 \times 300}\) = 3.40 g
Moles of CaCl2 = \(\frac{3.4}{111}\) = 0.03 mol.

Question 50.
Determine the osmotic pressure of a solution prepared by dissolving 25 mg of K2SO4 in two litre of water at 25°C assuming that it is completely disassociated.
Answer:
K2SO4 is strong electrolyte, ionises completely
K2SO4 → 2K+ + \(\mathrm{SO}_4^{2-}\)
Therefore i = 3
Volume of the solution = 2L
Mass of K2SO4 (WB) = 25 mg = 0025 g
Molar mass of K2SO4 (MB) = 174 g mol-1
π = iCRT = i × \(\frac{3 \times 0.025 \times 0.0821 \times 298}{174 \times 2}\)
= 5.27 × 10-3 atm

Question 51.
Benzene and Toluene form ideal solution over the entire range of composition. The vapour pressure of pure benzene and toluene at 300K are 50.71 mm of Hg and 32.06 mm of Hg respectively. Calculate the mole fraction of benzene in vapour phase if 80g of benzene is mixed with 100g of toluene.
Answer:
If yb is the mole fraction of benzene in vapour form
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 26
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 27

Intext Questions – Answers

Question 1.
Calculate the mass percentage of benzene (C6H6) and carbon tetrachloride (CCl4) if 22g of benzene is dissolved in 122g of carbon tetrachloride.
Answer:
Weight of Benzene, w = 22 g
Weight of carbon tetrachloride, W = 122 g
Mass percentage of benzene = \(\frac{w \times 100}{W+w}\)
= \(\frac{22 \times 100}{22+122}\) = 15.27%
Mass percentage of carbon tetrachloride
= \(\frac{W \times 100}{W+w}\) = \(\frac{122 \times 100}{22+122}\) = 84.73%

Question 2.
Calculate the mole fraction of benzene in solution containing 30% by mass of it in carbon tetrachloride.
Answer:
Mass of benzene, w = 30 g
Mol. wt of benzene = 78 g mol-1
Moles of benzene = \(\frac{30}{78}\) = 0.385
Mass of CCl4 = 70 g
Mol. wt. of CCl4 = 154 g mol-1
Moles of CCl4 = \(\frac{70(\mathrm{~g})}{154(\mathrm{~g})}\) = 0.454
Mole fraction of benzene = \(\frac{0.385}{0.385+0.454}\)
Mole fraction of CCl4 = (1 – XBenzene)
= 1 – 0.459 = 0.541

Question 3.
Calculate the molarity of each of the following solutions
(a) 30 g of CO(NO3)2. 6H2O in 4.3L of solution
(b) 30 ml of 0.5 M H2SO4 diluted to 500 ml.
Answer:
a) Mass of CO (NO3)2. 6H20 = 30 g
Molar mass of CO(NO3)2. 6H2O
= 297 g mol-1.
Volume of solution = 4.3 L
Molarity M = \(\frac{30(\mathrm{~g})}{297 \mathrm{gmol}^{-1} \times 4.3 \mathrm{~L}}\)
= 0.023 mol L-1

b) Initial volume V1 = 30 ml
Molarity M1 = 0.5 mol L-1
Final volume V2 = 500 ml
Final molarity M2 =?
M1V1 = M2V2 (or) M2 = \(\frac{M_1 V_1}{V_2}\)
= \(\frac{0.5 \times 30}{500}\) = 0.03 mol L-1

Question 4.
Calculate the mass of urea (NH2CONH2) required in makIng 2.5 kg of 0.25 molal aqueous solution.
Answer:
The mass of urea required = WB
Molar mass of urea MB = 60
Mass of solution WA + WB = 2.5 kg = 2500 gm.
Mass of solvent WA = 2500 – WB
Molarity m = 0.25 mol kg-1
m = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
0.25 = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{6.0 \times\left(2500-\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}}\right)}\)
Solving we get WB = 37.5 g.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 5.
Calculate
(a) molality
(b) molarity
(c) mole fraction of KI if the density of 20% (mass/ mass) aqueous KI is 1.202 g mL-1
Answer:
Mass of KI(WB) = 20 g
Molar mass of KI (MB) = 166 g mol-1
Density of solution (d) = 1.202 g mL-1
Mass of solution (WA + WB) = 100 g
Volume of solution (V) = \(\frac{\text { Mass }}{\text { density }}\)
= \(\frac{100}{1.202 \mathrm{gmL}^{-1}}\) = 83.2 ml
Mass of solvent WA = 100 – 20 = 80 g.

a) Molality (m) = \(\frac{W_B \times 1000}{M_B \times W_A}\)
= \(\frac{20 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{166 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 80 \mathrm{~g}}\)
= 1.51 mol kg-1

b) Molarity (M) = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}} \times \mathrm{V}}\)
= \(\frac{20 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~mL}}{166 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 83.2 \mathrm{ml}}\)
= 1.45 mol L-1

c)
Moles of KI(nB) = \(\frac{20 \mathrm{~g}}{166 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 1.51 mol
Moles of water (nA) = \(\frac{1000 \mathrm{~g}}{18 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 55.5
∴ Mole fraction of KI (xB) = \(\frac{1.51}{1.51+55.5}\)
= 0.026

Question 6.
H2S, a toxic gas with rotten egg like smell, is used for qualitative analysis. If the solubility of H2S in water at STP is 0.195 m, calculate Henry’s law constant.
Answer:
According to Henry’s law
KH . x = p or KH = \(\frac{p}{x}\)
P = 1 bar, solubility = 0.195 mol kg-1
Moles of H2S (nB) = 0.195
Moles of water (nA) = \(\frac{1000 \mathrm{~g}}{18 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 55.5
∴ Mole fraction of H2S (x)
= \(\frac{0.195}{0.195+55.5}\) = 3.5 × 10-3
KH = \(\frac{1(\text { bar) }}{3.5 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 285.6 bar

Question 7.
Henry’s law constant of CO2 in water is 1.67 × 108 Pa at 298K. Calculate the quantity of CO2 in 500 mL of soda water when packed under 25 atm CO2 pressure at 298 K.
Answer:
Pressure of CO2 (p) = 2.5 atm
= 2.5 atm × 101325\(\frac{(\mathrm{Pa})}{\mathrm{atm}}\)
= 253312.5 Pa
According to Henrys law
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 28
Moles of CO2 present in 500 ml
= \(\frac{0.0844}{2}\) mol = 0.0422 mol.
Amount of CO2 present in 500 ml
= 0.0422 mol × 440 g mol-1 = 1.86 g.

Question 8.
The vapour pressure of pure liquids A and B are 450 and 700 mm Hg respectively at 350K. Find out the composition of the liquid mixture if total vapour pressure is 600 mm Hg. Also find the composition of the vapour phase.
Answer:
Total vapour pressure PT = 600 mm Hg
Let Mole fraction of A is XA and that of B is XB
Vapour pressure of pure A(\(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^0\)) = 450 mm Hg
Vapour pressure of pure B(\(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{B}}^0\)) =700 mm Hg
Now PTotal = \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{A}}^0 \mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{A}}\) + \(\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{B}}^0 \mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{B}}\)
∴ 600 = 450 xA + 700 xB
= 450xA + 700(1 – xA)
= 700 – 250 xA or xA = 0.4
xB = 1 – xA = 1 – 0.4 = 0.6
Mole fraction of A in vapour phase
YA = \(\frac{x_A P_A^0}{P_{\text {Total }}^0}\) = \(\frac{0.4 \times 450}{600}\) = 0.3
Mole fraction of B in vapour phase
YB = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}_{\mathrm{B}} \mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{B}}^0}{\mathrm{P}_{\text {Total }}}\) = \(\frac{0.6 \times 700}{600}\) = 0.7

Question 9.
Vapour pressure of pure water at 298K is 23.8 mm Hg. 50 of urea (NH2 CO NH2) is dissolved in 850 g of water. Calculate the vapour pressure of water for this solution and its relative lowering.
Answer:
Mass of water = 850 g
Moles of water = \(\frac{850}{18}\) = 47.22 mol
Mass of urea = 50 g
Mol mass of urea = 60
Moles of urea = \(\frac{50}{60}\) = 0.83
Since the solution is not dilute the formula to be used is
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 29

Question 10.
Boiling point of water at 750 min Hg is 99.63°C. How much sucrose is to be added to 500g of water such that it boils at 100°C.
Answer:
Let mass of sucrose required = WB g
Mass of solvent WA = 500 g
Molar mass of sucrose (C12H22O11) = 342
Elevation in boiling point ΔTb = 100 – 99.63
= 0.37°C
ΔTb = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{B}} \times 1000}{\mathrm{~W}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
(or) WB = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{b}} \times \mathrm{W}_{\mathrm{A}} \times \mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{B}}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{b}} \times 1000}\)
= \(\frac{0.37 \times 500 \times 342}{0.52 \times 1000}\) = 121.

Question 11.
Calculate the mass of ascorbic acid (vitamin C, C6H8O6) to be dissolved in 75g of
acetic acid to lower its melting point by 1.5°C. Kf = 3.9 K kg mol-1.
Answer:
Let the mass of ascorbic acid required = WBg
Molar mass of ascorbic acid (C6H8O6) MB = 176 g mol-1
Mass of solvent (WA) = 75 g
Depression in melting point ΔTf = 1.5°C
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 30

Question 12.
Calculate the osmotic pressure In pascals exerted by a solution prepared by dissolving 1.0 g of polymer of molar mass 185,000 ion 450 ml of water at 37°C.
Answer:
Mass of polymer (WB) = 1.0 g
Molar mass of polymer MB = 1,85,000 g mol-1
T = 37 + 273.15 = 310.15K
π = \(\frac{W_B R_T}{M_B V_{(L)}}\)
= \(\frac{1 \times 0.082 \times 310.15}{185000 \times 450 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 3.05 × 10-4 atm
= 3.05 × 10-4 × 1.01 × 105Pa = 30.9 Pa

Problems

Question 1.
Calculate the mole fraction of ethylene glycol (C2H6O2) in a solution containing 20% of C2H6O2 by mass. (TS 15)
Answer:
Assume that we have 100 g of solution (one can start with any amount of solution because the results obtained will be the same). Solution will contain 20 g of ethylene glycol and 80 g of water.
Molar mass of C2H6O2 = 12 × 2 + 1 × 6 + 16 × 2 = 62 g mol-1.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 31

Question 2.
Calculate the molarity of a solution containing 5 g of NaOH in 450 mL solution. (TS Mar. 19; AP & TS 15)
Answer:
Moles of NaOH = \(\frac{5 \mathrm{~g}}{40 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 0.125 mol
Volume of the solution in litres = 450 mL /1000 mL L-1
Using equation (2.8)
Molarity = \(\frac{0.125 \mathrm{~mol} \times 1000 \mathrm{~mL} \mathrm{~L}^{-1}}{450 \mathrm{~mL}}\)
= 0.278 M = 0.278 mol L-1
= 0.278 mol dm-3

Question 3.
Calculate molality of 2.5 g of ethanoic acid (CH3COOH) in 75 g of benzene. (TS 15)
Answer:
Molar mass of C2H4O2 = 12 × 2 + 1 × 4 + 16 × 2 = 60 g mol-1.
Moles mass of C2H4O2 = \(\frac{2.5 \mathrm{~g}}{60 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= 0.0417 mol
Mass of benzene in kg = 75 g / 1000 g kg-1
= 75 × 10-3 kg
Molality of C2H4O2 = \(\frac{\text { moles of } \mathrm{C}_2 \mathrm{H}_4 \mathrm{O}_2}{\text { kg of benzene }}\)
= \(\frac{0.0417 \mathrm{~mol} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{75 \mathrm{~g}}\)
= 0.556 mol kg-1

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 4.
If N2 gas is bubbled through water at 293K, how many mililmoles of N2 gas would dissolve in 1 litre of water? Assume that N2 exerts a partial pressure of 0.987 bar. Given that Henry’s law constant for N2 at 293 K is 76.48 kbar.
Answer:
The solubility of gas is related to the mole fraction in aqueous solution. The mole fraction of the gas in the solution is calculated by applying Henry’s law. Thus:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 32
As 1 litre of water coñtains 55.5 mol of it, therefore If n represents number of moles of N2 in solution.
x(nitrogen) = \(\frac{n \mathrm{~mol}}{\mathrm{n} \mathrm{mol}+55.5 \mathrm{~mol}}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{n}}{55.5}\) = 1.29 × 10-5
(n in denominator is neglected as it is <<55.5)
Thus n = 1.29 × 10-5 × 55.5 mol
= 7.16 × 10-4 mol-1
= \(\frac{7.16 \times 10^{-4} \mathrm{~mol} \times 1000 \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~mol}}{1 \mathrm{~mol}}\)
= 0.716 m mol

Question 5.
Vapour pressure of chloroform (CHCl3) and dichloromethane (CH2Cl2) at 298 K are 200mm Hg and 415 mm Hg respectively.
(i) Calculate the vapour pressure of the solution prepared by mixing 25.5 g of CHCl3 and 40 g of CH2Cl2 at 298 K and,
(ii) mole fractions of each component in vapour phase.
Answer:
i) Molar mass of CH2Cl2 = 12 × 1 + 1 × 2 + 35.5 × 2 = 85 g mol-1
Molar mass of CHCl3 = 12 × 1 + 1 × 1 + 35.5 × 3 = 119.5 g mol-1
Moles of CH2Cl2 = \(\frac{40 \mathrm{~g}}{85 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 0.47 mol
Moles of CHCl3 = \(\frac{25.5 \mathrm{~g}}{119.5 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= 0.213 mol
Total number of moles = 0.47 + 0.213
= 0.683 mol
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 33
Using equation (2.16),
Ptotal = \(\mathrm{p}_1^0\) + (\(\mathrm{p}_2^0\) + \(\mathrm{p}_1^0\))x2
= 200 + (415 – 200) × 0.688
= 200 + 147.9 = 347.9 mm Hg

(ii) Using the relation (2.19) y1 = P1 / ptotal, we can calculate the mole fraction of the components in gas phase (y1).
\(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{CH}_2} \mathrm{Cl}_2\) = 0.688 × 415 mm Hg = 285.5 mm Hg
\(\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{CHCl}_3}\) = 0.312 × 200 mm Hg = 62.4 mm Hg
\(\mathbf{y}_{\mathrm{CH}_2 \mathrm{Cl}_2}\) = 285.5 mm Hg / 347.9 mm Hg = 0.82
\(\mathbf{y}_{\mathrm{CHCl} 3}\) = 62.4 mm Hg/ 347.9 mm Hg = 0.18

Note : Since, CH2Cl2 is a more volatile component than CHCl3, [\(\mathrm{p}_{\mathrm{CH}_2}^0 \mathrm{Cl}_2\) = 415 mm Hg and \(\mathbf{p}_{\mathrm{CHC} l_3}^0\) = 200 mm Hg] and the vapour phase is also richer in CH2Cl2 [\(\mathbf{y}_{\mathrm{CH}_2} \mathrm{Cl}_2\) = 0.82 and \(\mathbf{y}_{\mathrm{CHCl}_3} \)= 0.18], it may thus be concluded that at equilibrium, vapour phase will be always rich in the component which is more volatile.

Question 6.
The vapour pressure of pure benzene at a certain temperature is 0.850 bar. A non – volatile, non – electrolyte solid weighing 0.5 g when added to 39.0 g of benzene (molar mass 78 g mol-1). Vapour pressure of the solution, then, is 0.845 bar. What is the molar mass of the solid substance ? (Mar. 2018, 16 AP)
Answer:
The various quantities known to us are as follows :
\(\mathrm{p}_1^0\) = 0.850 bar ; p = 0.845 bar
M1 = 78 g mol-1; w2 = 0.5 g; w1 = 39 g
Substituting these values in equation (2.28), we get
\(\frac{0.850 \mathrm{bar}-0.845 \mathrm{bar}}{0.850 \mathrm{bar}}\) = \(\frac{0.5 \mathrm{~g} \times 78 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}{\mathrm{M}_2 \times 39 \mathrm{~g}}\)
Therefore, M2 = 170 g mol-1

Question 7.
18 g of glucose, C6H12O6, is dissolved in 1 kg of water In a saucepan. At what temperature will water boll at 1.013 bar? Kb for water is 0.52 K kg mol-1.
Answer:
Moles of glucose = 18 g / 180 g mol-1
= 0.1 mol
Number of kilograms of solvent = 1 kg
Thus molality of glucose solution
= 0.1 mol kg-1
For water, change in boiling point
ΔTb = Kb × m = 0.52 K kg mol-1 × 0.1 mol kg-1 = 0.052 K

Since water boils at 373.15 Kat 1.013 bar pressure, therefore, the boiling point of solution will be 373.15 + 0.052 = 373.202 K.

Question 8.
The boiling point of benzene is 353.23 K. When 1.80 g of a non – volatile solute was dissolved in 90 g of benzene, the boiling point is raised to 354.11 K. Calculate the molar mass of the solute. Kb for benzene is 2.53 K kg mol-1.
Answer:
The elevation (ΔTb) in the boiling point = 354.11 K – 352.23 K = 0.88 K
Substituting these values in expression (2.33) we get
M2 = \(\frac{2.53 \mathrm{~K} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 1.8 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{0.88 \mathrm{~K} \times 90 \mathrm{~g}}\)
= 58 g mol-1
Therefore, molar mass of the solute, M2 = 58 g mol-1

Question 9.
45 g of ethylene glycol (C2H6O2) is mixed with 600 g of water. Calculate
(a) the freezing point depression and
(b) the freezing point of the solution.
Answer:
Depression in freezing point is related to the molality, therefore, the molality of the solution with respect to ethylene glycol
moles of ethylene glycol mass of water in kilogram
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 34
Moles of ethylene glycol = \(\frac{45 \mathrm{~g}}{62 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
= 0.73 mol
Mass of water in kg = \(\frac{600 \mathrm{~g}}{1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}\) = 0.6 kg
Hence molality of ethylene glycol = \(\frac{0.73 \mathrm{~g}}{0.60 \mathrm{~kg}}\)
= 1.2 mol kg-1
Therefore freezing point depression.
ΔT1 = 1.86K kg mol-1 × 1.2 mol kg-1 = 2.2K
Freezing point of the aqueous solution
= 273.15 K – 2.2 K = 270.95 K

Question 10.
1.00 g of a non – electrolyte solute dissolved in 50 g of benzene lowered the freezing point of benzene by 0.40 K. The freezing
point depression constant of benzene is 5.12 K mol-1. Find the molar mass of the solute.
Answer:
Substituting the values of various terms involved in equation (2.36) we get.
M2 = \(\frac{5.12 \mathrm{~K} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 1.00 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{0.40 \times 50 \mathrm{~g}}\)
= 256 g mol-1
Thus, molar mass of the solute = 256 g mol-1

Question 11.
200 cm3 of an aqueous solution of a protein contains 1.26 g of the protein. The osmotic pressure of such a solution at 300 K is found to be 2.57 × 10-3 bar. Calculate the molar mass of the protein.
Answer:
The various quantities known to us are as follows : π = 2.57 × 10-3 bar,
V = 200 cm3 = 0.200 litre
T = 300 K
R = 0.083 L bar mol-1K-1
Substituting these values in equation (2.42) we get
M2 = \(\frac{1.26 \mathrm{~g} \times 0.083 \mathrm{~L} \mathrm{bar} \mathrm{K}^{-1} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 300 \mathrm{~K}}{2.57 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{bar} \times 0.200 \mathrm{~L}}\)
= 61.022 g mol-1

Question 12.
2 g of benzoic acid (C6H5COOH) dissolved in 25 g of benzene shows a depression in freezing point equal 101.62K. Molal depression constant for benzene is 4.9 K kg mol-1. What is the percentage association of acid if it forms dimer in solution?
Answer:
The given quantities are : w2 = 2 g;
Kf = 4.9 K kg mol-1 ; w1 = 25 g,
ΔTf = 1.62 K
Substituting these values in equation (2.36) we get:
M2 = \(\frac{4.9 \mathrm{~K} \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1} \times 2 \mathrm{~g} \times 1000 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~kg}^{-1}}{25 \mathrm{~g} \times 1.62 \mathrm{~K}}\)
= 241.98 g mol-1
Thus, experimental molar mass of benzoic acid in benzene is = 241.98 g mol-1
Now consider the following equilibrium for the acid:
2C6H5COOH \(\rightleftharpoons\) (C6H5COOH)2
If x represents the degree of association of the solute then we would have (1 – x) mol of benzoic acid left in unassociated form and correspondingly \(\frac{x}{2}\) as associated moles of benzoic acid at equilibrium. Therefore, total number of moles of particles at equilibrium is :
1 – x + \(\frac{x}{2}\) = 1 – \(\frac{x}{2}\)
Thus, total number of moles of particles at equilibrium equals van’t Hoff factor i.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 35
Therefore, degree of association of benzoic acid in benzene is 99.2%.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions

Question 13.
0.6 mL of acetic acid (CH3COOH), having density 1.06 g mL-1, is dissolved in 1 litre of water. The depression in freezing point observed for this strength of acid was 0.0205°C. Calculate the van’t Hoff factor and the dissociation constant of acid.
Answer:
Number of moles of acetic acid
= \(\frac{0.6 \mathrm{~mL} \times 1.06 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mL}^{-1}}{60 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\) = 0.0106 mol = n
Molarity = \(\frac{0.0106 \mathrm{~mol}}{1000 \mathrm{~mL} \times 1 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mL}^{-1}}\)
= 0.0106 mol kg-1
Using equation (2.35)
∆Tf = 1.86 K kg mol-1 × 0.0106 mol kg-1 = 0.0197K
van’t Hoff factor
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 36
Acetic acid is a weak electrolyte and will dissociate into two ions : acetate and hydrogen ions per molecule of acetic acid. If x is the degree of dissociation of acetic acid, then we would have n (1 – x) moles of undisso-ciated acetic acid, nx moles of CH3COO and nx moles of H+ ions.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 37
Thus total moles of particles are :
n(1 – x + x + x) = n(1 + x)
i = \(\frac{n(1+x)}{n}\) = 1 + x = 1.041
Thus degree of dissociation of acetic acid = x = 1.041 – 1.000 = 0.041
Then [CH3COOH] = n(1 – x)
= 0.0106 ( 1 – 0.041),
[CH3COO] = nx = 0.0106 × 0.041, [H+]
= nx = 0.0106 × 0.041.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 2 Solutions 38

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Students must practice these Maths 1A Important Questions TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type to help strengthen their preparations for exams.

TS Inter 1st Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 1.
If the function f is defined by
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 1
then find the 2x +1, x < -3 values if exist of f(4), f(2.5), f(- 2), f(- 4), f(0), f(- 7). [Mar 14]
Answer:
(i) f(4) For x > 3, f(x) = 3x – 2
f(4) = 3 (4) – 2 = 12 – 2 = 10

(ii) f(2.5) is not defined.

(iii) f(-2)
For – 2 ≤ x ≤ 2, f(x) = x2 – 2
f(- 2) = (- 2)2 – 2 = 4 – 2 = 2

(iv) f(-4)
For x < – 3, f(x) = 2x + 1
f(- 4) = 2(- 4) + 1 = – 8 + 1 = – 7

(v) f(0)
For – 2 ≤ x ≤ 2, f(x) = x2 – 2
f(0) = 02 – 2 = – 2

(vi) f(- 7)
For x < – 3, f(x) = 2x + 1
f(- 7) = 2 (- 7) + 1 = – 14 + 1 = – 13

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

If the function f is defined by
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 2
then find the values of
(i) f(3)
(ii) f(0)
(iii) f(-1.5)
(iv) f(2) + f(-2)
(v) f(- 5).
Answer:
(i) 5
(ii) 2
(iii) – 2.5
(iv) 1
(v) not defined

Question 2.
If A = \(\left\{0, \frac{\pi}{6}, \frac{\pi}{4}, \frac{\pi}{3}, \frac{\pi}{2}\right\}\) and f: A → B is a surjection defined by f(x) = cos x then find B. [Mar. (TS) 17, 16 (AP), 11 May 15 (AP), 15 (TS), 11]
Answer:
Given A = \(\left\{0, \frac{\pi}{6}, \frac{\pi}{4}, \frac{\pi}{3}, \frac{\pi}{2}\right\}\)
f(x) = cos x
Since f: A → B is a surjection then f(A) = B
f(0) = cos 0 = 1
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 3
∴ B = Range . f(A) = {1, \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}, \frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}, \frac{1}{2}\), o}

If A = {- 2, – 1, 0, 1, 2} and f: A → B is a surjection defined by f(x) = x2 + x + 1, then find B. [Mar. (AP) 19, 17] [Mar 16 (TS): May 14, 10]
Answer:
{3, 1, 7}

If A = {1, 2, 3, 4} and f: A → R is a function defined by f(x) = \(\frac{x^2-x+1}{x+1}\), then find the range of f.
Answer:
\(\left\{1, \frac{1}{2}, \frac{7}{4}, \frac{13}{5}\right\}\)

Question 3.
Determine whether the function f: R → R defined by
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 4
is an injection or a surjection or a bijection.
Answer:
Given f: R → R
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 5
If x = 3 > 2 then f(3) = 3
If x = 1 <2 then f(1) = 5(1) – 2 = 5 – 2 = 3
∴ 1 and 3 have same f image,
∴ f is not an injection.
If y ∈ R (co-domain) then y = x
x = y
then f (x) = x
f(x) = y
If y ∈ R (co-domain) then y = 5x – 2
y + 2 = 5x
x = \(\frac{y+2}{5}\)
then f (x) = 5x – 2
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 6
= y + 2 – 2 = y
∴ f is a surjection since f is not an injection then it is not a bijection.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 4.
If f: R → R, g : R → R are defined by f(x) = 4x – 1 and g(x) = x2 + 2 then find [May 09. Mar. 05, 04]
(i)(gof) (x)
(ii) (gof) \(\left(\frac{a+1}{4}\right)\)
(iii) (fof) (x)
(iv) [go (fof)] (0)
Answer:
Given f: R → R, g: R → R
f(x) = 4x – 1 and g(x) = x2 + 2

(i) (gof) (x) = g [f(x)] = g[4x – 1]
= (4x – 1)2 + 2
= 16x2 + 1 – 8x + 2
= 16x2 – 8x + 3

(ii) (gof) \(\left(\frac{a+1}{4}\right)\) = g \(\left[\mathrm{f}\left(\frac{\mathrm{a}+1}{4}\right)\right]\)
= g\(\left[4\left(\frac{a+1}{4}\right)-1\right]\)
= g[a + 1 – 1 ]
= g(a) = a2 + 2

(iii) (fof) (x) = f [f(x)] = f[4x – 1]
= 4 (4x – 1) – 1
= 16x – 4 – 1
= 16x – 5

(iv) [go (fof)] (0)
Now (fof) (0) = f[f(0)] = f[4(0) – 1] = f(- 1)
= 4( – 1) – 1 = – 4 – 1 = – 5
[go (fof)] (0) = go [(fof)(0)]
= g [- 5] = (- 5)2 + 2
= 25 + 2 = 27

Question 5.
If f: Q → Q is defined by f(x) = 5x + 4 for all x ∈ Q, show that ‘f is a bijection and find f-1. [Mar. 17 (TS). 16 (AP)]
Answer:
Given f: Q → Q, f(x) = 5x + 4, ∀ x ∈ Q
Let a1, a2 ∈ Q
f(a1) = f(a2)
5a1 + 4 = 5a2 + 4
5a1 = 5a2
a1 = a2
∴ f: Q → Q is an one – one function.
Let y ∈ Q (co-domain) then y = 5x + 4
y – 4 = 5x
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 7
f(x) = y
∴ f: Q → Q is an onto function.
∴ f: Q → Q is a bijection.
∴ f-1: Q → Q is a bijection.

Question 6.
If f : R → R, g : R → R are defined by f(x) = 3x – 1, g(x) = x2 + 1, then find (fog) (2). [Mar. 18 (AP) May 13; Mar 13]
Answer:
Given f: R → R and g : R → R defined by
f(x) = 3x – 1 ; g(x) = x2 + 1
(fog) (2) = f[g(2)] = f(22 + 1)
= f(5) = 3(5) – 1 = 14

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 7.
If f(x) = \(\frac{1}{x}\), g (x) = √x for all x ∈ (0, ∞), x then find (gof) (x).
Answer:
Given
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{x}\), g(x) = √x ∀ x ∈ (0, ∞)
Now (gof) (x) = g[f(x)] = g \(\left[\frac{1}{x}\right]\) = \(\sqrt{\frac{1}{x}}=\frac{1}{\sqrt{x}}\)

Question 8.
If f(x) = 2x – 1, g(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{2}\) for all x ∈ R, then find (gof) (x). [Mar 19 (AP); Sep 92]
Answer:
Given f(x) = 2x – 1, g(x) \(\frac{x+1}{2}\) ∀ x ∈ R
Now (gof) (x) = g[f(x)] = g(2x – 1)
= \(\frac{2 \mathrm{x}-1+1}{2}\) = \(\frac{2 x}{2x}\) = x

Question 9.
If f(x) = 2, g(x) = x2, h(x) = 2x for all x ∈ R, then find [fo(goh)] (x). [Mar. 17 (TS); July 01]
Answer:
Given f(x) = 2, g(x) = x2, h(x) = 2x ∀ x ∈ R.
Now (goh) (x) = g[h(x)] = g[2x] = (2x)2 = 4x2
[fo(goh)](x) = f[(goh) (x)] = f[4x2] = 2

Question 10.
Find the inverse function of f(x) = ax + b, (a ≠ 0); a, b ∈ R [Mar. 18 (TS); Mar. 13]
Answer:
Given, a, b ∈ R, f: R → R and
f(x) = ax + b
Let y = f(x) = ax + b
y = f(x) ⇒ x = f -1 (y) …………….. (1)
y = ax + b ⇒ ax = y – b ⇒ x = \(\frac{\mathrm{y}-\mathrm{b}}{\mathrm{a}}\) ……………… (2)
From (1) and (2)
f-1(y) = \(\frac{y-b}{a}\) ⇒ f-1(x) = \(\frac{x-b}{a}\)

If f: Q → Q is defined by f(x) = 5x + 4, for all x ∈ Q, find f-1. [Mar. 12, 10]
Answer:
\(\frac{x-4}{5}\)

Question 11.
Find the inverse function of f(x) = 5x [Mar. 15 (AP); Mar. ’11’, 06]
Answer:
Given f(x) = 5x
Let y = f(x) = 5x
y = f(x) ⇒ x = f-1(y) …………………. (1)
y = 5x ⇒ x = log5y ……………………. (2)
From (1) and (2),
f-1(y) = log5y ⇒ f-1 (x) = log5x

Question 12.
If f: R → R, g: R → R defined by f(x) = 3x – 2, g(x) = x2 + 1, then find (i) (gof-1) (2) (ii) (gof) (x – 1). [Mar. 08; May 06]
Answer:
Given f: R → R, g: R → R, f(x) = 3x – 2, g(x) = x2 – 1
Let y = f(x) = 3x – 2
y = f(x) ⇒ x = f-1 ……………. (1)
y = 3x – 2 ⇒ y + 2 = 3x
x = \(\frac{\mathrm{y}+2}{3}\) ………………….. (2)
From (1) & (2)
f-1(y) = \(\frac{\mathrm{y}+2}{3}\)
⇒ f-1 (x) = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}+2}{3}\)

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

(i) (gof-1) (2)
= g[f-1 (2)]
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 8

(ii) (gof) (x – 1)
= g[f(x -1)]
= g[3(x – 1) – 2]
= g[3x – 3 – 2]
= g(3x – 5)
= (3x – 5)2 + 1
= 9x2 + 25 – 30x + 1
= 9x2 – 30x + 26

Question 13.
If f(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{x-1}\) (x ≠ ± 1), then find (fofof) (x) [Mar. 05]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{x+1}{x-1}\) (x ≠ ± 1)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 9

If f(x) = \(\) (x ≠ ± 1), then find (fofofof) (x)
Answer:
x

Question 14.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{a^2-x^2}\) [June 04]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{a^2-x^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ a2 – x2 ≥ 0
⇒ x2 – a2 ≤ 0
⇒ (x + a) (x – a) ≤ 0
– a ≤ x ≤ a
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 10
⇒ x ∈ [-a, a]
∴ Domain of ‘f is [-a, a]

Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{16-x^2}\).
Answer:
[- 4, 4]

Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{9-x^2}\).
Answer:
[-3, 3]

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 15.
Find the domain of the real valued function
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\left(x^2-1\right)(x+3)}\). [May 14, 93; Mar. 14]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\left(x^2-1\right)(x+3)}\)
f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\left(x^2-1\right)(x+3)}\) ∈ R
⇒ (x2 – 1) (x + 3) ≠ 0
x2 – 1 ≠ 0, x + 3 ≠ 0
x2 ≠ 1, x ≠ – 3
x ≠ ± 1
∴ x ≠ -3, -1, 1
∴ Domain of ‘f is R – {-3, -1, 1}

Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{1}{6 x-x^2-5}\).
Answer:
R – {1, 5}

Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{2 x^2-5 x+7}{(x-1)(x-2)(x-3)}\)
Answer:
R- {1, 2, 3}

Question 16.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{4 x-x^2}\). [May 12, 10] [Mar; 18 (TS)]
Answer:
Given, f(x) = \(\sqrt{4 x-x^2}\) ∈ R
⇒ x(4 – x) ≥ 0
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 11
⇒ x(4 – x) ≥ 0
⇒ x(x-4) ≤ 0
⇒ (x – 0) (x – 4) ≤ 0
⇒ 0 ≤ x ≤ 4
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is [0, 4].

Question 17.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{1-x^2}}\)
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{1-x^2}}\) ∈ R
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 12
⇔ 1 – x2 > 0 “
⇔ (1 + x) (1 – x) > 0
⇔ x ∈ (-1, 1)
∴ Domain of T = {x/x ∈ (-1, 1)}

Question 18.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\sqrt{\mathbf{x}^2-25}\) [May 15 (AP); Mar. 12]
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\sqrt{x^2-25}\) ∈ R
⇒ x2 – 25 ≥ 0
⇒ (x + 5) (x – 5) ≥ 0
⇒ x < -5 or x > 5
⇒ x ∈ (- α, -5] ∪ [5, α)
∴ Domain of T is (-α, -5] ∪ [5, α).
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 13

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 19.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = log (x2 – 4x + 3) [Mar. 16 (TS), 10, ‘08 ; May 11, 07]
Answer:
Given f(x) = log (x2 – 4x + 3) ∈ R
⇒ x2 – 4x + 3 > 0
⇒ x2 – 3x – x + 3 > 0
⇒ x (x – 3) – 1 (x – 3) > 0
⇒ (x – 1) (x – 3) > 0
⇒ x < 1 or x > 3
⇒ x ∈ (- α, 1) ∪ (3, α)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 14

Question 20.
Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{3+x}+\sqrt{3-x}}{x}\)
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{3+x}+\sqrt{3-x}}{x}\) ∈ R
⇒ 3 + x ≥ 0 and 3 – x ≥ 0, x ≠ 0
x ≥ – 3 and 3 ≥ x, x ≠ 0, x ≤ 3
x ∈ [- 3, ∝) ∩ (-∝, 3) – {0}
⇒ x ∈ [- 3, 3] – {0}
(or)
⇒ x ∈ [- 3, 0) ∪ (0, 3]
∴ Domain of ‘f is [- 3, 3] – {0}
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 15

Find the domain of the real valued function f(x) = \(\frac{\sqrt{2+x}+\sqrt{2-x}}{x}\).
Answer:
[- 2, 0) ∪ (0, 2]

Question 21.
Find the range of the reed valued function, log |4 – x2|.
Answer:
Let y = f(x) = log |4 – x2|
f(x) ∈ R ⇒ 4 – x2 ≠ 0
x2 ≠ 4 ⇒ x ≠ ± 2
∴ Domain of ‘f is R – {- 2, 2}
∴ y = loge |4 – x2|
|4 – x2| = ey
⇒ ey > 0, ∀ y ∈ R
∴ Range of T is R.

Question 22.
Find the range of the real valued function. \(\frac{x^2-4}{x-2}\) [May 03, 97]
Answer:
Let y = f(x) = \(\frac{x^2-4}{x-2}\)
f(x) ∈ R ⇒ x – 2 ≠ 0 ⇒ x ≠ 2
∴ Domain of ‘f is R – {2}
Let y = \(\frac{x^2-4}{x-2}\), if x ≠ 2 then y = x + 2
If x = 2, then y = 2 + 2 = 4
y is not defined at x = 2, then y cannot be equal to 4.
∴ Range of T is R – {4}.

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

Question 23.
Find the domain and range of the function f(x) = \(\frac{x}{2-3 x}\)
Answer:
Given f(x) = \(\frac{x}{2-3 x}\) ∈ R
⇒ 2 – 3x ≠ 0
⇒ 2 ≠ 3x
⇒ x ≠ \(\frac{2}{3}\)
∴ Domain of ‘f’ is R – \(\left\{\frac{2}{3}\right\}\)
Let y = f(x) = \(\frac{x}{2-3 x}\)
∴ y = \(\frac{x}{2-3 x}\)
2y – 3xy = x ⇒ 2y = x + 3x ⇒ 2y = x(1 + 3y)
TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type 16

Question 24.
If f = {(4, 5), (5, 6), (6, – 4)} and g = {(4, -4), (6, 5), (8, 5)}, then find
(i) f + 4
(ii) fg
(iii) √f
(iv) f2.
Answer:
(i) f + 4
Domain of f + 4 = A = {4, 5, 6}
(f + 4) (x) = f(x) + 4
(f + 4) (4) = f(4) + 4 = 5 + 4 = 9
(f + 4) (5) = f(5) + 4 = 6 + 4= 10
(f + 4) (6) = f(6) + 4 = -4 + 4 = 0
∴ f + 4 = {(4, 9), (5, 10), (6, 0)}

(ii) fg
Domain of fg = A ∩ B = {4, 6}
(fg) (x) = f(x) . g(x)
(fg) (4) = f(4) . g(4) = 5(-4) = -20
(fg) (6) = f(6) . g(6) = (-4) (5) = -20
∴ fg = {(4, -20), (6, – 20)}

(iii) √f
Domain of √f = {4, 5, 6} = A
√f (x) = √f(x)
√f(4) = √f(4) = √5
√f (5) = √f(5) = √6
√f (6) = √f(6) = √-4 (does not exist)
∴ √f = {(4, √5), (5, √6)}

(iv) f2
Domain of f2 = A = {4, 5, 6}
f2(x) = [f(x)]2
f2(4) = [f(4)]2 = (5)2 = 25
f2(5) = [f(5)]2 = (6)2 = 36
f2(6) = [f(6)]2 = (- 4)2 = 16
∴ f2 = {(4, 25), (5, 36), (6, 16)}

TS Inter First Year Maths 1A Functions Important Questions Very Short Answer Type

If f = {(1, 2), (2, -3), (3, -1)}, then find
(i) 2f [Mar. 12; 94, 90; May 94]
(ii) 2 + f [Mar. 12; May 08]
(iii) f2 [Mar. 08, May. 95, 90]
(iv) √f
Answer:
(i) {(1, 4), (2, -6), (3, -2)}
(ii) {(1, 4), (2, -1), (3, 1)}
(iii) {(1, 4), (2, 9), (3, 1)}
(iv) {(1, √2)}

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 6th Lesson Work, Energy and Power Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 6th Lesson Work, Energy and Power

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
If a bomb at rest explodes into two pieces, the pieces must travel in opposite directions. Explain.
Answer:
Explosion is due to internal forces. In law of conservation of linear momentum internal forces cannot change the momentum of the system. So after explosion m1v1 + m2v2 = 0 or m1v1 = – m2v2 ⇒ they will fly in opposite directions.

Question 2.
State the conditions under which a force does no work.
Answer:

  1. When force (F) and displacement (S) are mutually perpendicular then work done is zero.
    ∵ W = \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}.\overline{\mathrm{S}}\) = |F| |S| cos θ when θ = 90° work W = 0
  2. Even though force is applied if displacement is zero then work done W = 0.

Question 3.
Define Work, Power and Energy. State their S.I. units.
Answer:
Work :
The product of force and displacement along the direction of force is called work.
Work done W = \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}.\overline{\mathrm{S}}\)
= \(|\overline{\mathrm{F}}||\overline{\mathrm{S}}|\) cos θ
S.I. unit of work is Joule.
Dimensional formula : ML²T-2.

Power :
The rate of doing work is called power.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 1
S.I. unit: Watt;
D.F. : ML²T-3

Energy :
It is the capacity or ability of the body to do work. By spending energy we can do work or by doing work energy contentment of the body will increase.
S.I. unit: Joule ; D.F. : MML²T-2

Question 4.
State the relation between the kinetic energy and momentum of a body.
Answer:
Kinetic energy K.E = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mv² ;
momentum \(\overline{\mathrm{p}}\) = mv
Relation between P and KE is
K.E = p²/2m. ⇒ P = \(\sqrt{K.E.2m}\)

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 5.
State the sign of work done by a force in the following.
a) Work done by a man in lifting a bucket out of a well by means of a rope tied to the bucket.
b) Work done by gravitational force in the above case.
Answer:
a) When a bucket is lifted out of well work is done against gravity so work done is negative.

b) Work done by gravitational force is positive.

Question 6.
State the sign of work done by a force in the following.
a) work done by friction on a body sliding down an inclined plane.
b) work done gravitational force in the above case.
Answer:
a) Work done by friction while sliding down is negative. Because it opposes downward motion of the body.

b) Work done by gravitational force when a body is sliding down is positive.

Question 7.
State the sign of work done by a force in the following.
a) work done by an applied force on a body moving on a rough horizontal plane with uniform velocity.
b) work done by the resistive force of air on a vibrating pendulum in bringing it to rest.
Answer:
a) Work done against the direction of motion of a body moving on a horizontal plane is negative.

b) In pendulum a∝ – y. So work done by air resistance to bring it to rest is considered as positive.

Question 8.
State if each of the following statements is true or false. Give reasons for your answer.
a) Total energy of a system is always conserved, no matter what internal and external forces on the body are present
b) The work done by earth’s gravitational force in keeping the moon in its orbit for its one revolution is zero.
Answer:
a) Law of conservation of energy states that energy can be neither created nor destroyed. This rule is applicable to internal forces and also for external forces when they are conservative forces.

b) Gravitational forces are conservative forces. Work done by conservative force around a closed path is zero.

Question 9.
Which physical quantity remains constant (i) in an elastic collision (ii) in an inelastic collision?
Answer:
In elastic collision :
P and K.E. are conserved, (remains constant)

In inelastic collision :
only momentum is conserved, (remains constant)

Question 10.
A body freely falling from a certain height ‘h’, after striking a smooth floor rebounds and h rises to a height h/2. What is the coefficient of restitution between the floor and the body?
Answer:
Given that, h1 = h and h2 = \(\frac{h}{2}\)
We know that coefficient of restitution.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 2

Question 11.
What is the total displacement of freely falling body, after successive rebounds from the same place of ground, before it comes to stop? Assume that V is the coefficient of restitution between the body and the ground.
Answer:
Total displacement of a freely falling body after successive rebounds from the same place of ground, before it comes to stop is equal to height (h) from which the body is dropped.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is potential energy? Derive an expression for the gravitational potential energy.
Answer:
Potential energy :
It is the energy possessed by a body by the virtue of its position.
Ex: Energy stored in water a over head tank, wound spring.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 3

Equation for potential energy :
Let a body of mass m is lifted through a height ‘h’ above the ground. Where ground is taken as refe-rence. In this process we are doing some work.

Work done against gravity W = m.g.h.
i. e., Force × displacement along the direction of force applied. This work done is stored in the body in the form of potential energy. Because work and energy can be interchanged.
∴ Potential Energy P.E. = mgh.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 2.
A lorry and a car moving with the same momentum are brought to rest by the application of brakes, which provide equal retarding forces. Which of them will come to rest in shorter time? Which will come to rest in less distance?
Answer:
Momentum (\(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\) = mv) is same for both lorry and car.
Work done to stop a body = Kinetic energy stored
∴ W = F. S = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv² = K.E. But force applied by brakes is same for lorry and car.
Relation between \(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\) on K.E. is
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 4

So lighter body (car) will travel longer distance when P, F are same.
Then mS = constant.
∴ So car travels longer distance than lorry before it is stopped.

Question 3.
Distinguish between conservative and non-conservative forces with one example each.
Answer:
i) Conservative forces :
If work done by the force around a closed path is zero and it is independent of the path then such forces are called conservative forces.

Example:

  1. Work done in lifting a body in gravitational field. When the body returns to its original position work done on it is zero.
    So gravitational forces are conservative forces.
  2. Let a charge ‘q’ is moved in an electric field on a closed path then change in its electric potential i.e., static forces are conservative forces.

ii) Non-conservative forces :
For non-conservative forces work done by a force around a closed path is not equal to zero and it is dependent on the path.
Ex: Work done to move a body against friction. While taking a body between two points say A & B. We have to do work to move the body from A to B and also work is done to move the body from B to A. As result, the work done in moving the body in a closed path is not equals to zero. So frictional forces are non-conservative forces.

Question 4.
Show that in the case of one dimensional elastic collision, the relative velocity of approach of two colliding bodies before collision is equal to the relative velocity of separation after collision.
Answer:
To show relative velocity of approach of two colliding bodies before collision is equal to relative velocity of separation after collision.

Let two bodies of masses m1, m2 are moving with velocities u1, u2 along the straight line in same direction collided elastically.

Let their velocities after collision be v1 and v2.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 5

According to the law of conservation of linear momentum
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2 or m1(u1 – v1) = m2(v2 – u2) ………… (1)

According to law of conservation of kinetic energy
\(\frac{1}{2}\)m11 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)m2u²2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)m12 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)m22
m1(u²1 – v²1) = m2(v²2 – u²2) ………. (2)
Dividing eqn. (2) by (1)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 6
u1 + v1 = v2 + u2 ⇒ u1 – u2 = v2 – v1 ……. (3)
i.e., relative velocity of approach of the two bodies before collision = relative velocity of separation of the two bodies after collision. So coefficient of restitution is equal to ‘1’.

Question 5.
Show that two equal masses undergo oblique elastic collision will move at right angles after collision, if the second body initially at rest.
Answer:
Consider two bodies possess equal mass (m) and they undergo oblique elastic collision.

Let the first body moving with initial velocity ‘u’ collides with the second body at rest.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 7

In elastic collision, momentum is conserved. So, conservation of momentum along X-axis yields.
mu = mv1 cos θ1 + mv2 cos θ2.
(i.e.) u = v1 cos θ1 + v2 cos θ2 ……. (1)
along Y-axis
0 = v1 sin θ1 – v2 sin θ2 ……… (2)
squaring and adding eq. (1) and (2) we get
u² = v²1 + v²2 + 2v1v2 cos (θ1 + θ2) …. (3)
As the collision is elastic,
Kinetic Energy (K.E.) is also conserved.

From eq. (3) and (4) 2v1v2 cos(θ1 + θ2) = 0
As it is given that v1 ≠ 0 and v2 ≠ 0
∴ cos(θ1 + θ2) = 0 or θ1 + θ2 = 90°.
The two equal masses undergoing oblique elastic collision will move at right angles after collision, if the second body initially at rest.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 6.
Derive an expression for the height attained by a freely falling body after ‘n’ number of rebounds from the floor.
Answer:
Let a small ball be dropped from a height ‘h’ on a horizontal smooth plate. Let it rebounds to a height ‘h1‘.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 8

Velocity with which it strikes the plate u1 = \(\sqrt{2gh}\)
Velocity with which it leaves the plate v1 = \(\sqrt{2gh_1}\)

The velocity of plate before and after collision is zero i.e., u2 = 0, v2 = 0
Coefficient of restitution,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 9
For 2nd rebound it goes to a height
h2 = e²h1 = e²e²h = e4h

For 3rd rebound it goes to a height
h3 = e²h2 = e²e4h = e6h

For nth rebound height attained
hn = e2nh.

Question 7.
Explain the law of conservation of energy.
Answer:
Law of conservation of energy:
Wien forces doing work on a system are conservative then total energy of the system is constant i.e., energy can neither be created nor destroyed.
i.e., Total energy = (K + u) = constant form.

Explanation :
Consider a body undergoes small displacement ∆x under the action of conservative force F. According to work energy theorem.
Change in K.E = work done
∆K = F(x)∆x ………….. (1)
but Potential energy Au = -F(x)∆x ………….. (2)
from (1) and (2) = ∆K = – ∆u
⇒ ∆(K + u) = 0
Hence (K + u) = constant
i.e., sum of the kinetic energy and potential energy of the body is a constant

Since the universe may be considered as an isolated system, the total energy of the universe is constant.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Develop the notions of work and kinetic energy and show that it leads to work- energy theorem. State the conditions under which a force does no work. [AP Mar. I 7, 15, May 1 7; TS Mar. 15]
Answer:
Work :
The product of component of force in the direction of displacement and the magnitude of displacement is called work.
W = \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}.\overline{\mathrm{S}}\)
When \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{S}}\) are parallel W = \(|\overline{\mathrm{F}}|\times|\overline{\mathrm{S}}|\)
When \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{S}}\) has some angle 6 between them
W = \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}.\overline{\mathrm{S}}\) cos θ
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 10

Kinetic energy :
Energy possessed by a moving body is called kinetic energy (k)

The kinetic energy of an object is a measure of the work that an object can do by the virtue of its motion.

Kinetic energy can be measured with equation K = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mv²
Ex : All moving bodies contain kinetic energy.

Work energy theorem (For variable force):
Work done by a variable force is always equal to the change in kinetic energy of the body.
Work done W = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mV² – \(\frac{1}{2}\)mV²0? = Kf – Ki

Proof :
Kinetic energy of a body K = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mv²
Time rate of change of kinetic energy is
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 11

When force is conservative force F = F(x)
∴ On integration over initial position (x1) and final position x2
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 12

i.e., work done by a conservative force is equal to change in kinetic energy of the body.
Condition for Force not to do any work.

When Force (\(\overline{\mathrm{F}}\)) and displacement (\(\overline{\mathrm{S}}\)) are perpendicular work done is zero, i.e., when
θ = 90° then W = \(\overline{\mathrm{F}}.\overline{\mathrm{S}}\) = 0

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 2.
What are collisions? Explain the possible types of collisions? Develop the theory of one dimensional elastic collision. [TS Mar.’ 18; AF Mar. 19. May 14]
Answer:
A process in which the motion of a system of particles changes but keeping the total momentum conserved is called collision.

Collisions are two types :

  1. elastic
  2. inelastic.

To show relative velocity of approach before collision is equal to relative velocity of separation after collision.

Let two bodies of masses m1, m2 are moving with velocities u1, u2 along the same line in same direction collided elastically.

Let their velocities after collision are v1 and v2.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 13

According to the law of conservation of linear momentum
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
or m1 ( u1 – v1 ) = m2 ( v2 – u2 ) ……… (1)

According to law of conservation of kinetic energy
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 14

i.e., In elastic collisions relative velocity of approach of the two bodies before collision = relative velocity of separation of the two bodies after collision.

Velocities of two bodies after elastic collision:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 15

Question 3.
State and prove law of conservation of energy in case of a freely falling body. [TS Mar. ’19, ’17, ’16, May ’18, ’17, ’16, June ’15; AP Mar. ’18, ’16, ’15, May ’18, ’16, June ’15, May ’13]
Answer:
Law of conservation of energy :
Energy can neither be created nor destroyed. But it can be converted from one form into the another form so that the total energy will remains constant in a closed system.

Proof : In case of a freely fidling body :
Let a body of mass is dropped from a height H’ at point A.

Forces due to gravitational field are conservative forces, so total mechanical energy (E = P.E + K.E.) is constant i.e., neither destroyed nor created.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 16

The conversion of potential energy to kinetic energy for a ball of mass ra dropped from a height H

1. At point H : Velocity of body v = 0
⇒ K = 0
Potential energy (u) = mgH
where H=height above the ground
T.E = u + K = mgH (1)

2. At point 0 :
i.e., just before touching the ground :
A constant force is a special case of specially dependent force F(x) so mechanical energy is conserved.
So energy at H = Energy at 0 = mgH

Proof:
At point ‘0’ height h = 0 ⇒
⇒ v = \(\sqrt{2gH}\) ; u = 0
K0 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv² = \(\frac{1}{2}\) m2gH = mgH
Total energy E = mgH + 0 = mgH ………….. (2)

3. At any point h:
Let height above ground = h
u = mgh, Kh = \(\frac{1}{2}\)mV²
where v = \(\sqrt{2g(h – x)}\)
∴ Velocity of the body when it falls through a height (h – x) is \(\sqrt{2g(h – x)}\)
∴ Total energy =mgh + \(\frac{1}{2}\)m2g(H – h)
⇒ E = mgh + mgH – mgh = mgH ………… (3)
From eq. 1, 2 & 3 total energy at any point is constant.
Hence, law of conservation of energy is proved.

Conditions to apply law of conservation of energy:

  1. Work done by internal forces is conservative.
  2. No work is done by external force.

When the above two conditions are satisfied then total mechanical energy of a system will remain constant.

Problems

Question 1.
A test tube of mass 10 grams closed with a cork of mass 1 gram contains some ether. When the test tube is heated the cork flies out under the presssure of the ether gas. The test tube is suspended horizontally by a weight less rigid bar of length 5 cm. What is the minimum velocity with which the cork should fly out of the tube, so that test tube describing a full vertical circle about the point O. Neglect the mass of ether.
Solution:
Length of bar, L = 5 cm, = \(\frac{5}{100}\), g = 10m/s²
For the cork not to come out minimum velocity at lowest point is, v = \(\sqrt{5gL}\). At this condition centrifugal and centripetal forces are balanced.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 17

Question 2.
A machine gun fires 360 bullets per minute and each bullet travels with a velocity of 600 ms-1. If the mass of each bullet is 5 gm, find the power of the machine gun? [AP May ’16, ’13, June ’15, Mar. ’14; AP Mar. ’18. ’16; TS May ’18]
Solution:
Number of bullets, n = 360
Time, t = 1 minute = 60s
Velocty of the bullet, v = 600 ms-1 ; Mass of each bullet, m = 5gm = 5 × 10-3 kg
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 18
⇒ P = 5400W = 5.4KW

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 3.
Find the useful power used in pumping 3425 m³ of water per hour from a well 8 m deep to the surface, supposing 40% of the horse power during pumping is wasted. What is the horse power of the engine?
Solution:
Mass of water pumped, m = 3425 m³
= 3425 × 10³ kg.
Mass of lm³ water = 1000 kg
Depth of well d = 8 m., Power wasted = 40%
∴ efficiency, η = 60%
time, t = 1 hour = 3600 sec.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 19

Question 4.
A pump is required to lift 600 kg of water per minute from a well 25m deep and to eject it with a speed of 50 ms-1. Calculate the power required to perform the above task? (g = 10 m sec-2) [TS Mar. ’19, ’16; AP May 18, Mar. 15, June 15]
Solution:
Mass of water m = 600 kg; depth = h = 25 m
Speed of water v = 25 m/s; g = 10 m/s², time t = 1 min = 60 sec.
Power of motor P = Power to lift water (P1) + Kinetic energy of water (K.E) per second.
Power to lift water
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 20
∴ Power of motor P = 2500 + 3125 = 5625 watt 5.625 K.W.

Question 5.
A block of mass 5 kg initially at rest at the origin is acted on by a force along the X-positive direction represented by F=(20 + 5x)N. Calculate the work done by the force during the displacement of the block from x = 0 to x = 4m.
Solution:
Mass of block, m = 5 kg
Force acting on the block, F = (20 + 5x) N
If ‘w’ is the total amount of work done to displace the block from x = 0 to x = 4m then,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 21

Question 6.
A block of mass 5 kg is sliding down a smooth inclined plane as shown. The spring arranged near the bottom of the inclined plane has a force constant 600 N/m. Find the compression in the spring at the moment the velocity of the block is maximum?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 22
Solution:
Mass of the block, m = 5kg
Force constant, K = 600 N m-1
From figure, sin θ = \(\frac{3}{5}\)
Force produced by the motion in the block,
F = mg sin0 ⇒ F = 5 × 9.8 × \(\frac{3}{5}\) = 29.4 N
But force constant K = \(\frac{F}{x}\) x
∴ x = \(\frac{F}{K}=\frac{29.5}{600}\) = 0.05m = 5cm

Question 7.
A force F = – \(\frac{K}{x^2}\) (x ≠ 0) acts on a particle along the X-axis. Find the work done by the force in displacing the particle from x = + a to x = + 2a. Take K as a positive constant.
Solution:
Force acting on the particle, F = –\(\frac{K}{x^2}\)
Total amount of work done to displace the particle from x = + a to x = + 2a is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 23

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 8.
A force F acting on a particle varies with the position x as shown in the graph. Find the work done by the force in displacing the particle from x = – a to x = + 2a?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 24
Solution:
Average force acting on the particle, F = \(\frac{F}{K}\)

Amount of work done by the force to displace the particle from x = -a to x = +2a is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 25

Question 9.
From a height of 20 m above a horizontal floor, a ball is thrown down with initial velocity 20 m/s. After striking the floor, the ball bounces to the same height from which it was thrown. Find the coefficient of restitution for the collision between the ball and the floor? (g = 10 m/s²)
Solution:
Initial velocity = u¹ = 20 m/s, h – 20 m,
g = 10 m/s²

Velocity of approach,
u² = u = u +2as = 400+ 2 × 10 × 20
⇒ u² = 400 + 400 = 800 ⇒ u = 20√2
Height of rebounce = h = 20 m.
∴ Velocity of separation
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 26

Question 10.
A ball falls from a height of 10 m on to a hard horizontal floor and repeatedly bounces. If the coefficient of restitution is \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}\), then what is the total distance travelled by the ball before it ceases to rebound?
Solution:
Height from which the ball is allowed to fall, h = 10 m
Coefficient of restitution between the hard horizontal floor and the ball, e = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}\)
∴ Total distance travelled by the ball before it ceases to rebound,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 27

Question 11.
In a ballistics demonstration, a police officer fires a bullet of mass 50g with speed 200 msr1 on soft plywood of thickness 2 cm. The bullet emerges with only 10% of its initial kinetic energy. What is the emergent speed of the bullet?
Answer:
Mass of bullet m = 50g = 0.05 kg
Initial velocity V0 = 200 m/s
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 28

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power

Question 12.
Find the total energy of a body of 5 kg mass, which is at a height of 10 in from the earth and foiling downwards straightly with a velocity of 20 m/s. (Take the acceleration due to gravity as 10 m/s²) [TS May ’16]
Answer:
Mass m = 5 kg; Height h = 10 m ; g = 10 m/s²
Velocity v = 20 m/s.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 6 Work, Energy and Power 29

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 1st Lesson Solid State Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material 1st Lesson Solid State

Very Short Answer Questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
Define the term ‘amorphous’. Give a few examples of amorphous solids.
Answer:
An amorphous solid is a substance whose constituent particles do not possess a regular orderly arrangement. Ex : Glass, plastics, rubber, starch etc.

Question 2.
What makes a glass different from a solid such as quartz?
Answer:
Glass is an amorphous form of silica and do not posses long range regular structure. It do not posses sharp melting point.

Quartz is a crystalline form of silica and have long range regular structure. It has sharp melting point. If the molten quartz Is cooled rapidly it becomes glass.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 3.
Classify each of the following solids as ionic, metallic, molecular, network (covalent) or amorphous.
a) Tetra phosphorous deoxide
b) Graphite
c) Brass
d) Ammonium phosphate (NH4)3 PO4
e) SIC
f) Rb
g) I2
h) LiBr
i) P4
j) Si
k) plastic.
Answer:
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 1

Question 4.
What is meant by the term coordination number?
Answer:
The number of nearest neighbours of a particle in a packing is called coordination number, eg : in hexagonal close packing coordination number is 12.

Question 5.
What is the coordination number of atoms in cubic close – pack structure ?
Answer:
In cubic close – packed structure coordi-nation number is 12.

Question 6.
What is the coordination number of atoms in a body – centered cubic structure ?
Answer:
In a body centred cubic structure coordi-nation number is 8.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 7.
Stability of a crystal is reflected in the magnitude of Its melting point. Comment.
Answer:
If the interparticle forces are stronger more energy is required to separate them. The crystals in which jilter particle forces are stronger are stable. More stable crystals have higher melting points than less stable crystals. Hence we can say that stability of a crystal is reflected in magnitude of its melting point.

Question 8.
How are the intermolecular forces among the molecules affect the melting point ?
Answer:
If the intermolecular forces among the molecules are stronger, more energy is required to separate them. Such solids require more amount of energy to melt. Hence they have higher melting points. If the intermolecular forces are weak, less energy is sufficient to melt them. Such solids have low melting points.

Question 9.
How do you distinguish between hexagonal close packing and cubic close packing structures ?
Answer:
In hexagonal close – packing every third layer is similar to the first layer. Thus there is ABABAB ………. arrangement. In cubic close packing every fourth layer is similar to first, there is ABC ABC…. arrangement.

Question 10.
How do you distinguish between crystal lattice and unit cell ?
Answer:
A crystal lattice may be defined as a regular three dimensional arrangement of identical points in space.
A unit cell may be defined as a three dimensional group of lattice points that generates the whole lattice by translation or stacking. It is the smallest repetitive portion of the crystal lattice.

Question 11.
How many lattice points are there in one unit cell of face – centered cubic lattice ?
Answer:
A face centred cubic unit cell has lattice points at the corners of the cube and at face centres. So it contain 8 + 6 = 14 lattice points.

Question 12.
How many lattice points are there in one unit cell of face centered tetragonal lattice ?
Answer:
A face centred tetragonal unit cell has 4 atoms per unit cell.

Question 13.
How many lattice points are there in one unit cell of body centered cubic lattice ?
Answer:
A body centred cubic unit cell has lattice points at the corners of the cube and at the body centre. So the total number of lattice points in one unit cell of a body centred cubic lattice is 9.

Question 14.
What is a semiconductor ?
Answer:
Semiconductors are solids with conductivi-ties in the intermediate range from 10-6 to 104 ohm-1 m-1. Their conductivity increases with increase in temperature.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 15.
What is Schottky defect ? (AP & TS ’15)
Answer:
The Schottky defect is simply a vacancy defect in ionic solids. This is due to missing of equal number of positive and negative ions. It is more common in ionic compounds
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 2
with high coordination number and in the ionic scJlids which contain positive and negative ions of equal size. This defect decreases density of the substance, eg. NaCl, KCl, CsCl, AgBr.

Question 16.
What is Frenkel defect ? (AP & TS ’15) (Mar. 2018 . TS)
Answer:
Frenkel defect arises when the smaller ion of ionic solids is dislocated from its normal site to an interstitial site. Frenkel defects
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 3
are common in ionic solids having low coordination number and large difference in the sizes of positive and negative ions. The density of the substance do not change, eg. ZnS, AgCl, AgBr and Agl.

Question 17.
What is interstitial defect ?
Answer:
If the constituent particles of a solid occupies the interstitial sites instead of lattice points, it is called interstitial defect. It is observed in non – ionic solids.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 4

Question 18.
What are F – centres ?
Answer:
A compound may have excess metal ion if a negative ion is absent from its lattice site, leaving a hole which is occupied by electron to maintain electrical neutrality. The holes occupied by electrons are called F – centres.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 5

Question 19.
Explain ferromagnetism with suitable example.
Answer:
The substances which are strongly attracted by external magnetic field are called ferromagnetic substances. They contain unpaired electrons, eg. iron, cobalt, nickel.

Question 20.
Explain paramagnetism with suitable example.
Answer:
Substances which are weakly attracted by a magnetic field are called paramagnetic substances. This is due to the presence of one or more unpaired electrons. Ex : O2, Cu+2, Fe+3, Cr+3 etc.

Question 21.
Explain Ferromagnetism with suitable example.
Answer:
When the magnetic moments of the domains in a substance are aligned in parallel and anti parallel directions in unequal numbers, then they are said to exhibit Fern magnetism. They are weakly attracted by magnetic field.
Eg: Fe3O4, MgFe2O4, NiFe2O4 etc.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 6

Question 22.
Explain Antiferro magnetism with suitable example.
Answer:
When the magnetic moments of the domain in a substance are aligned in opposite directions and cancel out each others moment, then they are said to exhibit Anti ferromagnetism.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 7

Question 23.
Why x-ray are needed to probe the crystal structures ?
Answer:
According to a fundamental principle of optics, the wavelength of light used to observe an object must be no greater than twice the length of the object itself. Since atoms have diameters of around 2 × 10-10 m and the visible light detected by our eyes has wavelength of 4 – 7 × 10-7 m, it is impossible to see atoms using even the tinest optical microscope. Hence, to see atoms we must use light wdth a wave length of approximately 10-10 m, which is in the x – ray region of electromagnetic spectrum.

Short Answer Questions (4 Marks)

Question 24.
Explain similarities and differences between metallic and ionic crystals.
Answer:
Similarities:

  1. In metallic and Ionic solids the constituent particles are in regular arrangement. So both have a regular shape.
  2. In both solids the bond is non – directional.
  3. Both solids are hard.

Differences:

  1. In metallic crystals the constituent particles are positive ions immersed in sea of mobile electrons but in ionic solids the constituent particles are positive and negative ions.
  2. In metallic crystals binding force is metallic bond whereas in ionic crystals is ionic bond.
  3. Metallic crystals are conductors of electricity while ionic crystals are insulators in solid state and act as conductors in molten state and aqueous solutions.
  4. Metallic crystals are malleable and ductile while ionic crystals are brittle.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 25.
Explain why ionic solids are hard and brittle.
Answer:
Ionic solids are hard because in ionic solids, ions are held together by strong electrostatic attractive forces. If sufficient force is applied on ionic crystals, the ions with similar charges come close due to displacement. Thus the crystal breaks due to repulsions between similar charges.
Hence Ionic solids are brittle.

Question 26.
Calculate the efficiency of packing In case of a metal of simple cubic crystal.
Answer:
Packing efficiency in simple cubic lattice:
In a simple cubic lattice the atoms are located only on the corners of the cube. The particles touch each other along the edge.
Thus, the edge length or šide of the cube
‘a’, and the radius of each particle, r are related as a = 2r
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 8
Simple cubic unit cell. The spheres are in contact with each other along the edge of the cube.
The volume of the cubic unit cell = a3
= (2r)3 = 8r3
Since a simple cubic unit cell contains only 1 atom.
The volume of the occupied space = \(\frac{4}{3} \pi r^3\)
Packing efficiency
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 9

Question 27.
Calculate the efficiency of packing in case of a metal of body – centred cubic crystal.
Answer:
From Fig it is clear that the atom at the centre will be in touch with the other two atoms diagonally arranged.
In ΔEFD
b2 = a2 + a2 = 2a2
b = \(\sqrt{2} a\)
Now in ΔAFD
c2 = a2 + b2 = a2 + 2a2 = 3a2
c = \(\sqrt{3} a\)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 10
(sphere along the body diagonal are shown with solid boundaries).
The length of the body diagonal c is equal to 4r.

where r is the radius of the sphere (atom), as all the three špheres along the diagonal touch each other.
Therefore, \(\sqrt{3} a\) = 4r = a = \(\frac{4 r}{\sqrt{3}}\)
Also we can write, r = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4} a\)
In this type of structure, total number of atoms is 2 and their volume is 2 × \(\left(\frac{4}{3}\right) \pi r^3\)
Volume of the cube, a3 will be equal to
\(\left(\frac{4}{\sqrt{3}} \mathrm{r}\right)^3\) or a3 = \(\left(\frac{4}{\sqrt{3}} \mathrm{r}\right)^3\)
Therefore
Packing efficiency
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 11

Question 28.
Calculate the efficiency of packing in case of face – centered cubic crystal.
Answer:
Both types of close packing (hep and ccp) are equally efficient. Let us calculate the efficiency of packing in ccp structure. In Fig. let the unit cell edge length be a’ and face diagonal AC = b.
In Δ ABC
AC2 = b2 = BC2 + AB2 = a2 + a2 = 2a2 (or)
b = \(\sqrt{2}\)
If r is the radius of the sphere, we find b = 4r = \(\sqrt{2 a}\) (or) a = \(\frac{4 r}{\sqrt{2}}\) = \(2 \sqrt{2 r}\)
(we can also write, r = \(\frac{a}{2 \sqrt{2}}\))
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 12
Cubic close packing other sides are not provided with spheres for sake of clarity

We know, that each unit cell in ccp structure, has effectively 4 spheres. Total volume of four spheres is equal to 4 × (4/3) πr3 and volume of the cube is a3 or \((2 \sqrt{2} r)^3\).
Therefore,
Packing efficiency
Volume occupied by four spheres
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 13
The same packing efficiency occurs in hep arrangement also.

Question 29.
A cubic solid is made of two elements P and Q. Atoms of Q are at the corners of the cube and P at the body – centre. What is the formula of the compound ? What are the coordination numbers of P and Q ?
Answer:
The atom at corner makes \(\frac{1}{8}\) contribution while atom at body centre makes 1 contri-bution to the unit cell.
No. of atoms of Q per unit cell
= 8 (at corners) × \(\frac{1}{8}\) = 1
No. of atoms of P per unit cell
= 1 (at body centre) × 1 = 1
∴ Formula of the compound is PQ.
The atom at the body centre would be in contact with all the atoms at the corners. Hence the coordination number of P would be 8. Similarly coordination number of Q is also 8.

Question 30.
If the radius of the octahedral void is ‘r’ and radius of the atoms in close packing is ‘R’, derive relation between r and R.
Answer:
The octahedral void can be represented as follows.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 14
Though an octahedral void is surrounded by six spheres only four are shown in the figure. The spheres present above and below the void are omitted.
Let the length of one side of the square ABCD is a cm.
In right angled ΔABC,
The diagonal AC
= \(\sqrt{\mathrm{AB}^2+\mathrm{BC}^2}\) = \(\sqrt{a^2+a^2}\) = \(\sqrt{2} a\)
But AC = 2R + 2r ∴ 2R + 2r = \(\sqrt{2} a\)
But a = 2R ∴ 2R + 2r = \(\sqrt{2} .2 \mathrm{R}\)
Dividing by 2R we get 1 + \(\frac{r}{R}\) = \(\sqrt{2}\)
\(\frac{r}{R}\) = \(\sqrt{2}\) – 1 = 1.414 – 1 = 0.414

Question 31.
Describe the two main types of semiconductors and contrast their conduction mechanism. (Mar. ’19, ’18. AP)
Answer:
Semiconductors are o two types. They are
1) Intrinsic semiconductors
2) Extrinsic semiconductors.

1) Intrinsic semiconductors: In this type of semiconductors, electrical conductivity increases with rise in temperature, since more electrons can jump to conduction band. Eg :Silicon and Germanium.

2) Extrinsic semiconductors: In this type of semiconductors, conductivity is increased by adding a appropriate amount of suitable impurity. This process is called Doping. Doping can be done with an impurity which is electron rich or electron deficient. These are of two types.

a) n – type semiconductors : The semi-conductors in which the increase in conductivity is due to the negatively charged electron are called n-type semiconductors.
Eg : Silicon and germanium of group 14 doped with a group 15 elements like P or As form n – type semiconductors.

b) p – type semiconductors : The semi-conductors in which the increase in conductivity is due to the positively charged holes are called p – type semi-conductors.
Ex : Silicon or germanium can also be doped with group B elements like B, Al or Ga from p-type semiconductors.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 32.
Classify each of the following as either a p – type or a n – type semiconductor.
1) Ge doped with In
2) Si doped with B.
Answer:
1) Ge is an element of group -14. Its outer electronic configuration is 4s2 4p2. When it is doped with In group – 13 element having 5s2 5p1 configuration it can form three covalent bonds with germanium. The fourth bond of germanium contains only one electron and hence it is an electron deficient bond or a hole is created. Conductivity is due to these holes. Therefore it is a p – type semiconductor.

2) Silicon is an element of group -14 with an outer electron configuration 2s2 2p2. When it is doped with Boron, an element of group -13 with 3s2 3p1 configuration, it can form three covalent bonds with silicon. The fourth bond of silicon contain only one electron and hence it is an electron deficient bond or a hole is created. Conductivity is due to these holes. Therefore it is a p – type semi-conductor.

Question 33.
Analysis shows that nickel oxide has the formula Ni0.98O1.00. What fractions of nickel exist as Ni2+ and Ni3+ ions ?
Answer:
From the given formula it is clear that for every 100 oxide ions there are only 98 nickel ions. Suppose, out of 98 nickel ions x exist as Ni2+ and the remaining (98 – x) exist as Ni3+
Total positive charge on 98 nickel ions = x × 2 + (98 – x) 3
Total negative charge on 100 oxide ions
= 100 × 2 = 200
Due to electrical neutrality,
x × 2 + (98 – x)3 = 200
2x + 294 – 3x = 200
x = 94
∴ Fraction of nickel as Ni2+ = \(\frac{94}{98}\) × 100
= 96%
Fraction of nickel as Ni3+ = (100 – 96)% = 4%

Question 34.
Gold (atomic radius = 0.144nin) crystallizes in a face centred unit cell. What is the length of a side of the unit cell?
Answer:
Radius of gold atom r = 0.144 nm
In face centred unit cell, lace diagonal
= 4r = \(\sqrt{2} a\)
∴ a = \(\frac{4 \mathrm{r}}{\sqrt{2}}\) = \(2 \sqrt{2}\) × r = 2 × 1.414 × 0.144mn
= 0.407 nm
Edge length of unit cell, a = 0.407 nm

Question 35.
In terms of band theory, what is the difference between a conductor and an insulator?
Answer:
In a metal the outer orbitals of very large number of atoms overlap to form a very large number of molecular orbitals that are delocalised over the metal. As a result a large number of energy levels are crowded together into bands. The highest occupied energy band is called the valence band while the lowest unoccupied energy band is called conduction band. The energy difference separating the valence band and conduction band is called band gap or energy gap.

In conductors the valence band is only partially filled. So electrons may easily excited from lower energy level to higher energy level by supplying a very small amount of energy. When a voltage is applied to a metal crystal, electrons are excited to the unoccupied orbitals in the same band and move towards the positive terminal. Thus, a material with partly filled energy band is a conductor.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 15
In case of insulators, the highest occupied band is completely filled. The energy gap between the fully filled valence band and the vacant conduction band is very large and it is not possible to excite the electrons to the conduction band. So they become insulators.

Question 36.
In terms of band theory, what is the’ difference between a conductor and a semiconductor?
Answer:
In a metal the outer orbitals of very large number of atoms overlap to form a very large number of molecular orbitals that are delocalised over the metal. As a result a large number of energy levels are crowded together into bauds. The highest occupied energy band is called the valence hand while the lowest unoccupied energy band is called conduction band. The energy difference separating the valence band and conduction band is called band gap or energy gap.

In conductors the valence band is only partially filled. So electrons may easily excited from lower energy level to higher energy level by supplying a very small amount of energy. When a voltage is applied to a metal crystal, electrons are excited to the unoccupied orbitals in the same band and move towards the positive terminal. Thus, a material with partly filled energy band is a conductor.

In the case of semiconductors, the forbidden band i.e., the energy gap bet-ween valence band and conduction band is little. The thermal energy available at room temperature is enough to excite some electrons from the highest occupied band to the next permitted energy band. So conductivity occurs but their conductivity is in between the conductors and insulators.

Question 37.
If NaCl is doped with 1 × 10-3mol percent of SrCl2, what is the concentration of cation vacancies?
Answer:
Every Sr2+ ion causes one cation vacancy (because two Na+ ions are replaced by one Sr2+).
Therefore, introduction of 10-3 moles of SrCl2 per 100 moles of NaCl would introduce 10-3 mole cation vacancies in 100 moles of NaCl.
No. of vacancies per mole of NaCl
= \(\frac{10^{-3}}{100}\) × 6.02 × 1023
= 6.02 × 1018 vacancies mol-1.

Question 38.
Derive Bragg’s equation. (TS Mar. 19) (AP 17, 16, 15; TS 16, 15; IPE 14)
Answer:
When a beam of X – rays strikes a crystal, the constituent particles of the crystal scatter or deflect some of the X – rays from their original path. The scattered X – rays can be detected on a photographic plate. From the diffraction pattern, the distance between constituent particles in a crystal can be studied.

In the above figure X – rays with wave-length λ strike a crystal face at an angle θ and then reflect at the same angle. The rays that strike an atom in the second layer are diffracted at the same angle θ, but because the second layer of atoms away from the X – ray source, the distance that the X – rays has to travel is more to reach the second layer. The path difference is indicated by AB in the figure. AB is equal to the distance between atomic layers d(=zB) times the sine of the angle θ.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 16
sin θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{AB}}{\mathrm{d}}\) ; so AB = d sin θ
The X – rays have to travel a total extra distance AB + BC.
AB + BC = 2d sin θ (∴ AB = BC)
The different X – rays striking the two layers of atoms are in – phase initially and also they will be in – phase after reflection only the extra distance AB + BC is equal to a whole number of wavelengths nX where n is an integer (1, 2, 3, 4….)
∴ AB + BC = 2d sin θ = nλ
This is known as Bragg’s equation.
By knowing the value of φ, λ the value of θ can be measured, and the value of n is a small integer, usually 1. Thus the distance d between layers of atoms in a crystal can be calculated.

Long Answer Questions (8 Marks)

Question 39.
How do you determine the atomic mass of an unknown metal if you know its density and dimension of its unit cell ? Explain.
Answer:
From the dimensions of the unit cell, it is possible to calculate the volume of the unit cell. From the knowledge of the density of unit cell we can calculate the mass of atoms in the unit cell or vice versa.
If we know the edge length of a cubic crystal of an element or compound, we can easily calculate its density as described below.

Consider a unit cell of edge ‘a’ picometer (pm)
The length of the edge of the cell = a pm
= a × 10-12m
= a × 10-10 cm
Volume of unit cell = (a × 10-10 cm)3
= a3 × 10-30 cm3
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 17
Mass of unit cell = Number of atoms in unit cell × mass of each atom = Z × m
Where Z = number of atoms in unit cell and m = mass of each atom.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 18
Mass of unit cell = Z × \(\frac{M}{N_o}\)
Substituting in (1) we get
∴ Density of unit cell = \(\frac{\mathrm{Z} \times \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{a}^3 \times 10^{-30} \times \mathrm{N}_o}\) gm cm-3

If ‘a’ is in pm, then density will be in g cm-3. Density of unit cell is the same as the density of the substance. li the density of the metal and dimensions of unit cell are known the atomic mass can be calculated
by using the above equation.

Question 40.
Silver crystallizes In FCC lattice. If edge of the cell is 4.07 × 10-8cm and density is 10.5 gcm-3. Calculate the atomic mass of silver.
Answer:
The edge length of unit cell, .
a = 4.077 × 10-8cm.
Number of atoms in FCC unit cell Z = 4
Density d = 10.5 g cm-3
Atomic mass M =?
Avogadro constant N0 = 6.023 × 1023
We know that density
d = \(\frac{\mathrm{ZM}}{\mathrm{a}^{-3} \mathrm{~N}_{\mathrm{o}}}\) or M = \(\frac{d a^3 \mathrm{~N}_{\mathrm{o}}}{\mathrm{Z}}\)
M = \(\frac{10.5 \times\left(4.077 \times 10^{-8}\right)^3 \times 6.023 \times 10^{23}}{4}\)
= 107.8
∴ Atomic mass of silver = 107.8U

Question 41.
Niobium crystallizes In body – centred cubic structure. If density is 8.55 g cm-3. Calculate atomic radius of niobium using its atomic mass 93U.
A. Density = 8.55 g cm3
Let length of tie edge = a cm
Volume of unit cell = a3 cm3
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 19
Number of atoms per unit cell = 2 (bcc)
Mass of unit cell = \(\frac{2 \times 93}{6.023 \times 10^{23}}\)
Volume of unit cell =
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 20
= \(\frac{2 \times 93}{6.023 \times 10^{23} \times 8.55}\) = 36.12 × 10-24 cm3
∴ a3 = 36.12 × 10-24 cm3
Edge length a = (36.12 × 10-4)1/3
= 3.306 × 10-8 cm
= 3.306 × 10-10 m
Now radius, in body centred cubic r = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{4} a\)
= \(\frac{\sqrt{3} \times 3.306 \times 10^{-10}}{4}\)
= 1.431 × 10-10 m
= 0.143 nm. (or) 143 pm.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 42.
Copper crystallizes Into a fcc lattice with edge length 3.61 × 10-8cm. Show that the calculated density is in agreement with its measured value of 8.92 g cm-3.
Answer:
Volume of the unit cell = (361 × 10-10)3 cm3
= 47.4 × 10-24 cm3
Molar mass of copper = 63.5 g mol-1
In a face centred cubic unit cell, there are four atoms per unit cell.
Mass of unit cell = \(\frac{4 \times 63.5 \mathrm{~g} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}{6.02 \times 10^{23} \mathrm{~mol}^{-1}}\)
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 21
Thus the calculated value of density is in agreement with the measured value of density.

Question 43.
Ferric oxide crystallizes in a hexagonal close packed array of oxide ions with two out of every three octahedral holes occupied by ferric ions. Derive the formula of ferric oxide.
Answer:
In hexagonal close packed arrangement of oxide ions, each oxide ion has one octahedral hole associated with it.
For each O2- ion there is one octahedral void in the structure and two of three are occupied by Fe3+ ion.
∴ Number of Fe3+ ions present per oxide ion = \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Thus the formula of ferric oxide should be Fe2/3 O1 or Fe2 O3.

Question 44.
Aluminium crystallizes in a cubic close packed structure. Its metallic radius is 125 pm.
(i) What is the length of the side of the unit cell ?
(ii) How many unit cells are there in 1.00 cm3 of aluminium ?
Answer:
i) In cubic close packed structure, the face diagonal of the unit cell is equal to four times the atomic radius.
Face diagonal = 4 × r = 4 × 125 pm = 500 pm
But face diagonal = \(\sqrt{2}\) × edge length
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 22
= 354 pm.

ii) Volume of one unit cell = a3
= (3.54 × 10-8 cm)3
No of unit cells in 1.00 cm3
= \(\frac{100}{\left(3.54 \times 10^{-8}\right)^3}\) = 2.26 × 1022

Question 45.
How do you obtain the diffraction pattern for a crystalline substance ?
Answer:
The diffraction pattern for a crystalline sub-stance can be obtained by Debye – Scherrer method.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 23

A monochromatic X – ray beam from a source ‘S’ is made incident on a crystal powder sample filled in a thin walled glass capillary tube ‘C’. As a result of diffraction from all sets of lattice planes, diffraction maxima arise which are recorded with a detector placed on the circumference of a circle centred on the powder specimen. The essential features of a diffractometer are shown in figure. A powder specimen C is supported on a table H, which can be rotated about an axis 0 perpendicular to the plane of the drawing. The X – ray source S is also normal to the plane of the drawing and therefore parallel to the diffractometer axis O. X – rays diverge from the source S and are diffracted by the specimen to form con-vergent diffracted beam which comes to a focus at the slit F and then enters ionisation chamber or photographic plate G.

The ioni-sation chamber contains methyl bromide vapours. The energy of the X – rays causes ionisation so that there is a flow of current. The current is measured with electrometer E. The extent of ionisation in the vapours is shown by the electrometer reading. As the intensity of the diffracted X – rays increase, the degree of ionisation also increases. For a set of parallel planes making an angle ‘θ’ with the incident beam of X – rays that satisfy Bragg’s equation, the intensity of the diffracted beam is measured. In Debye – Scherrer powder method the angle 2θ for the diffracted X – rays corresponding to each and every lattice plane is measured along with the intensities of diffracted X – rays with the help of the electrometer. A graph is drawn between the diffracted angle (2θ) and intensity of X – rays. This gives the diffraction pattern for a crystal line substance.

Intext Questions – Answers

Question 1.
Why are solids rigid ?
Answer:
In solids

  1. the intermolecular distances are short,
  2. intermolecular forces are strong,
  3. the constituent particles (atoms, molecules or ions) have fixed positions and can only oscillate about their mean positions. So solids are rigid and incompressible.

Question 2.
Why do solids have a definite volume ?
Answer:
In solids the strong intermolecular forces bring the particles (atoms, molecules or ions) so close that they cling to one another and occupy fixed positions. So solids have definite volume and shape.

Question 3.
Classify the following as amorphous or crystalline solids : Polyurethane, naphthalene, benzoic acid, teflon, potassium nitrate, cellophane, polyvinyl chloride, fibre glass, copper.
Answer:
Amorphous solids : Polyurethane, teflon, cellophane, polyvinyl chloride, fibre glass.
Crystalline solids : Naphthalene, benzoic acid, potassium nitrate, copper.

Question 4.
Why is glass considered a super cooled liquid ?
Answer:
Glass is an amorphous solid. The structure of amorphous solids is similar to that of liquids. So glass is considered as a super cooled liquid.

Question 5.
Refractive index of a solid is observed to have the same value along all directions. Comment on the nature of the solid. Would It show cleavage property?
Answer:
In amorphous solids the particles do not have long range order and their arrangement is irregular along all directions. So the value of any physical property would be same along any direction. This property is known as isotropy.

Question 6.
Classify the following solids into different categories based on the nature of inter- molecular forces operating in them: Potassium sulphate, tin, benzene, urea, ammonia, water, zinc sulphide, graphite, rubidium, argon, silicon carbide.
Answer:

  1. Molecular solids: Benzene, urea, ammonia, water and argon. Among these benzene and argon contain dispersion or London forces. Urea, ammonia and water contain hydrogen bonding.
  2. Ionic solids : Potassium sulphate, zinc sulphide.
  3. Metallic solids: Tin, rubidium.
  4. Covalent or network solids : Graphite and silicon carbide.

Question 7.
Solid A is a very hard electrical insulator in solid as well as in molten state and melts at extremely high temperature. What type of solid is it ?
Answer:
In covalent or network solids the adjacent atoms are bonded through covalent bonds throughout the crystal. Covalent bonds are strong and directional in nature, therefore atoms are held very strongly at their positions. Such solids are very hard and brittle. They have extremely high melting points. Hence solid A is covalent solid.

Question 8.
Ionic solids conduct electricity in molten state but not in solid state. Explain.
Answer:
Ionic solids do not conduct electricity in solid state because ions are held by strong electrostatic forces and are not free to move. However, in molten state the ions become free to move. Hence ionic substances conduct electricity in molten state.

Question 9.
What type of solids are electrical conductors, malleable and ductile ?
Answer:
Metallic solids are electrical conductors, malleable and ductile.

Metals are orderly collection of positive ions surrounded by and held together by a sea of free electrons which are mobile and spread throughout the crystal. These free moving electrons are responsible for high electrical and thermal conductivity of metals.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 10.
Give the significance of a ‘lattice point’.
Answer:
If the three dimensional arrangement of constituent particles in a crystal is repre-sented diagramatically, in which each particle is depicted as a point, the arrangement is called crystal lattice and the points are called lattice points. Thus a lattice point represents a particle (atom, molecule or ion) in a crystal.

Question 11.
Name the parameters that characterise a unit cell.
Answer:
A unit cell is characterised by

  1. its dimensions along the three edges a, b and c. These edges may or may not be mutually perpendicular.
  2. Angles between the edges α (between b and c), β (between a and c) and γ (between a and b).
    Thus a unit cell is characterised by six parameters, a, b, c, α, β and γ.

Question 12.
Distinguish between
i) Hexagonal and monoclinic unit cells.
ii) Face centred and end – centred unit cells.
Answer:
(i) In hexagonal unit cell a = b ≠ c and α = β = 90°, γ = 120° but in monoclinic unit cell a ≠ b ≠ c and α = γ = 90°, β ≠ 120°.
(ii) In face centred unit cell a ≠ b ≠ c and α = β = γ = 90° but in end – centred unit cell a ≠ b ≠ c and α = β = γ = 90°.

Question 13.
Explain how much portion of an atom located at
i) corner and
ii) body centre of a cubic unit cell is part of its neighbouring unit cell.
Answer:
i) Each atom at a corner is shared between eight adjacent unit cells. Therefore only \(\frac{1}{8}\)th of an atom belongs to a particular unit cell.
ii) The atom at the body centre wholly belongs to the unit cell in which it is present.

Question 14.
What is the two dimensional coordination number of a molecule in square close – packed layer?
Answer:
In a square close packed layer, the two dimensional coordination number of a molecule is 4.
TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State 24

Question 15.
A compound forms hexagonal close – packed structure. What is the total number of voids in 0.5 mol of it ? How many of these are tetrahedral voids ?
Answer:
Let the number of close packed spheres be ‘N’ then
The number of octahedral voids = N
The number of tetrahedral voids = 2N
∴ Total number of voids = 3N
Since 1 mol of a substance contain No (Avogadro number) particles (atoms or molecules or ions). The total number of voids in one mol is 3No. In 0.5 mol the total number of voids is 1 .5No. Among these the number of tetrahedral voids is 1.0No.

TS Inter 2nd Year Chemistry Study Material Chapter 1 Solid State

Question 16.
A compound is formed by two elements M and N. The element N forms ccp and atoms of M occupy 1/3 rd of tetrahedral voids. What is the formula of the compound?
Answer:
In cubic close packing structure with each atom of N there would be two tetrahedral voids. Because only 1/3 rd of tetrahedral voids are occupied by M there would be 2/3 M for each N. Thus formula of the compound is M2/3 N or M2N3.

Question 17.
Which of the following lattices has the highest packing efficiency
i) simple cubic
ii) body centred cubic and
iii) hexagonal close – packed lattice ?
Answer:
The efficiency of
i) simple cubic is 52.4%
ii) body centred cubic is 68% and
iii) hexagonal close – packed lattice is 74%. So hexagonal close – packed lattice has highest packing efficiency.

Question 18.
An element with molar mass 2.7 × 10-2 kg mol-1 forms a cubic unit cell with edge length 405 pm. If its density is 2.7 × 10-3 kg m-3, what is the nature of the cubic unit cell ?
Answer:
Density d = 2.7 × 103 kg m-3
Molar mass M = 2.1 × 10-2 kg mol-1
Edge length, a = 405 pm or 405 × 10-12 m
Density d = \(\frac{\mathrm{Z} \times \mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{a}^3 \times \mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{A}}}\)
or Z = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \times \mathrm{a}^3 \times \mathrm{N}_{\mathrm{A}}}{\mathrm{M}}\)
= \(\frac{2.7 \times 10^3 \times\left(405 \times 10^{-12}\right)^3 \times 6.022 \times 10^{23}}{2.7 \times 10^{-2}}\) = 4
Since the number of atoms per unit cell is 4 the cubic unit cell must be face centred cube (fcc) (or) ccp. „

Question 19.
What type of defect can arise when a solid is heated ? Which physical property is affected by it and in what way ?
Answer:
On heating a solid vacancy defects may arise. Due to the vacancies the density of the solid would be effected. The density of the solid would decrease due to vacancy defects.

Question 20.
What type of stoichiometric defect is shown by
i) ZnS
ii) AgBr ?
Answer:
i) ZnS shows Frenkel defect.
ii) AgBr shows Frenkel defect as well as Schottky defect.

Question 21.
Explain how vacancies are introduced in an ionic solid when a cation of higher valence is added as an impurity in it.
Answer:
If a cation of higher valence is introduced into an ionic solid as impurity, it occupies some site that occupied by host cations. In order to maintain electrical neutrality some host ions are missing from their sites leaving behind vacancies. For example, when Sr2+ ions are added to NaCl as impurity, each Sr2+ ion replaces two Na+ ions. Sr2+ ion occupies the site of one Na+ ion and the other site remains vacant. Thus, the number of vacancies equal to the number of Sr2+ ions added are produced.

Question 22.
Ionic solids, which have anionic vacan-cies due to metal excess defect, develop colour. Explain with the help of a suitable example.
Answer:
The colour is due to the excitation of electrons in F- centres by absorbing energy from visible light falling on the crystals, e.g. the anion vacancies in NaCl impart yellow colour to the compound.

Question 23.
A group 14 element is to be converted into n – type semiconductor by doping it with a suitable impurity. To which group should this impurity belong ?
Answer:
To convert the group 14 element into n -type semiconductor it should be doped with an impurity containing extra electron required for bonding. The impurity element should belong to group -15. It may be phosphorous or arsenic. Silicon doped with group – 15 element behaves as a n – type semiconductor.

Question 24.
What type of substances would make better permanent magnets, ferromagnetic or ferrimagnetic ? Justify your answer.
Answer:
Ferromagnetic substances would make better permanent magnets because in ferromagnetic substances all the domains get oriented in one direction. When such a substance is placed in a magnetic field. A strong magnetic effect is produced. These substances remain magnetised even when magnetic field is removed.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 5th Lesson Laws of Motion Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 5th Lesson Laws of Motion

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Why are spokes provided in a bicycle wheel? [AP May ’14. ’13]
Answer:
The spokes of cycle wheel increase its moment of inertia. The greater the moment of inertia, the greater is the opposition to any change in uniform rotational motion. As a result the cycle runs smoother and steadier. If the cycle wheel had no spokes, the cycle would be driven with jerks and hence unsafe.

Question 2.
What is inertia? What gives the measure of inertia? [TS ‘Mar. 17; AP Mar. 19, 14]
Answer:
The inability of a body to change its state by itself is known as inertia.

Mass of a body is a measure for its Inertia.
Types of inertia

  1. Inertia of rest
  2. Inertia of motion
  3. Inertia of direction.

Question 3.
According to Newton’s third law, every force is accompanied by an equal and opposite force. How can a movement ever take place? [AP May 17, June 15]
Answer:
From Newton’s third law action = – reaction. But action and reaction are not working on the same system. So they will not cancel each other. Hence, motion is possible.

Question 4.
When a bullet is fired from a gun, the gun gives a kick in the backward direction. Explain. [AP Mar. ’15]
Answer:
Firing of a gun is due to internal forces. Internal forces do not change the momentum of the system. Before firing m1u1 + m2u2 = 0. Since system is at rest after firing m1v1 + m2v2 = 0 (or) m1v1 = – m2v2. So gun and bullet will move in opposite directions to satisfy law of conservation of linear momentum.

Question 5.
Why does a heavy rifle not recoil as strongly as a light rifle using the same cartridges?
Answer:
Velocity (or) recoil v = \(\frac{mv}{M}\) i.e., ratio of momentum of bullet to mass of gun. If mass of gun is high then velocity of recoil is less with same cartridge.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 6.
If a bomb at rest explodes into two pieces, the pieces must travel in opposite directions. Explain. [TS Mar. 16, 15, June 15]
Answer:
Explosion is due to internal forces. From law of conservation of linear momentum, internal forces cannot change the momentum of the system. So after explosion m1v1 + m2v2 = 0 (or) m1v1 = – m2v2. According to law of conservation of linear momentum they will fly in opposite directions.

Question 7.
Define force. What are the basic forces in nature?
Answer:
Force is that which changes (or) tries to change the state of a body.

The basic forces in nature are :

  1. Gravitational forces,
  2. Electromagnetic forces,
  3. Nuclear forces.

Question 8.
Can the coefficient of friction be greater than one?
Answer:
Yes. Generally coefficient of friction between the surfaces is always less than one. But under some special conditions like on extreme rough surfaces coefficient of friction may be greater than one.

Question 9.
Why does the car with a flattened tyre stop sooner than the one with inflated tyres?
Answer:
Due to flattening of tyres, frictional force increases. Because rolling frictional force between the surfaces is proportional to area of contact. Area of contact increases for flattened tyres. So rolling frictional force increases and the car will be stopped quickly.

Question 10.
A horse has to pull harder during the start of the motion than later. Explain. [AP Mar. 18, May 16, Mar. 13]
Answer:
To start motion in a body we must apply force to overcome static friction (Fs = µsmg). When once motion is started between the bodies then kinetic frictional force comes into act. Kinetic friction (Fk = µkmg) is always less than static friction. So it is tough to start a body from rest than to keep it in motion.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 11.
WHat happens to the coefficient of friction if the weight of the body is doubled? [TS Mar. 19; AP Mar. 16, May 14]
Answer:
When weight of the body is doubled still then there is no change in coefficient of friction. Because frictional force cc normal reaction. So when weight of a body is doubled then frictional force and normal reaction will also becomes doubled and coefficient of friction remains constant.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
A stone of mass 0.1 kg is thrown vertically upwards. Give the magnitude and direction of the net force on the stone (a) during its upward motion, (b) during its downward motion, (c) at the highest point, where it momentarily comes to rest.
Answer:
Mass of stone, m = 0.1 kg.
a) During upward motion force acts downwards due to acceleration due to gravity.
Magnitude of force F = mg = 0.1 × 9.8
= 0.98 N (↓)
b) During downward motion force acts downward. Magnitude of force F = mg
= 0.1 × 9.8 = 0.98N (↓)

c) At highest point velocity v = 0. But still g will act on it only in downward motion so resultant force F = 0.98 N. downward.
Note : In the entire journey of the body force due to gravitational pull acts only in downward direction.

d) If the body is thrown with an angle of 30° with horizontal then vertical component of gravitational force does not change, hence in this case downward force F = mg = 0.1 × 9.8
= 0. 98 newton.

Question 2.
Define the terms momentum and impulse. State and explain the law of conservation of linear momentum. Give examples. [TS May 18, June 15]
Answer:
Momentum (\(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\)) : It is the product of mass and velocity of a body.

Momentum (\(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\)) = mass (m) × velocity (v)
∴ (\(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\)) = m\(\overline{\mathrm{v}}\)

Impulse (J) :
When a large force (F) acts on a body for small time (t) then the product of force and time is called Impulse.
Impulse (J) = Force (F) × time (t)
∴ Impulse (J) = F × t

Law of conservation of linear momentum:
There is no external force act on the system. The total linear momentum of the isolated system remains constant.

Proof :
Let two bodies of masses say A and B are moving with initial momenta PA and PB collided with each other. During collision they are in contact for a small time say ∆t. During this time of contact they will exchange their momenta. Let final momenta of the bodies are P¹A and P¹B. Let force applied by A on B is FAB and force applied by B on A is FBA.

From Newton’s 3rd Law FAB = FBA or FAB ∆t = FBA ∆t

From 2nd Law FAB∆t = P¹A – PA change in momentum of A.
FBA ∆t = P¹B – PB change in momentum of B.
∴ P¹B – PA = P¹B – PB or PA + PB = P¹B + P¹B
i. e., sum of momentum before collision is equals to sum of momentum after collision.

Question 3.
Why are shock absorbers used in motor cycles and cars? [AP June ’15]
Answer:
When vehicles are passing over the vertocies and depressions of a rough road they will collides with them for a very short period. This causes impulse effect. Due to large mass and high speed of the vehicles the magnitude of impulse is also high. Impulse may cause damage to the car or even to the passengers in it.

The bad effects of impulse is less if time of contact is more. Impulse J = F.t. For the same magnitude of impulse (change in momentum) if time of contact is high force acting on the vehicle is less. Shock absorbers will absorb the impulse and releases the same force slowly. This is due to large time constant of the springs.

So shock absorbers are used in vehicles to reduce impulse effects.

Question 4.
Explain the terms limiting friction, dynamic friction and rolling friction.
Answer:
Limiting friction :
Frictional forces always oppose relative motion between the bodies. These forces are self adjusting forces. Their magnitude will increase upto some extent with the value of applied force.

The maximum frictional force between the bodies at rest is called “limiting friction”.

Dynamic (or) kinetic friction :
When applied force is equal to or greater than limiting friction then the body will move. When once motion is started then frictional , force will abruptly falls to a minimum value.

Frictional force between moving bodies is called dynamic (or) kinetic friction. Kinetic friction is always less than limiting friction.

Rolling friction :
The resistance encountered by a rolling body on a surface is called rolling friction.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 5.
Explain the advantages and disadvantages of friction. [TS Mar. ’17, ’15; AF Mar. ’15]
Answer:
Advantages of friction :

  1. We are able to walk because of friction.
  2. It is impossible for a car to move on a slippery road.
  3. Breaking system of vehicles works with the help of friction.
  4. Friction between roads and tyres provides the necessary external force to accelerate the car.
  5. Transmission of power to various parts of a machine through belts is possible by friction.

Disadvantages of friction:

  1. In many cases we will try to reduce friction because it dissipates energy into heat.
  2. It causes wear and tear to machine parts which causes frequent replacement of machine parts.

Question 6.
Explain Friction. Mention the methods used to decrease friction. [TS May, ’17, ’16; Mar. ’19, ’16; AP Mar. ’18. ’14; May ’18, ’14)
Answer:
Friction :
It is a contact force parallel to the surfaces in contact Friction will always oppose relative motion between the bodies.

Friction is a necessary evil. Friction is a must at some places and it must be reduced at some places.

Methods to reduce friction :
1) Polishing :
Friction causes due to surface irregularities. So by polishing friction can be reduced to some extent.

2) Lubricants :
By using lubricants friction can be reduced. Lubricants will spread as an ultra thin layer between the surfaces in contact and in friction decreases.

3) A thin cushion of air maintained between solid surfaces reduces friction.
Ex : Air pressure in tyres.

4) Ball bearings :
Ball bearings are used to reduce friction between machine parts.

Ball bearings will convert sliding motion into rolling motion. As a result friction is reduced.

Question 7.
State the laws of rolling friction.
Answer:
When a body is rolling over the other, then friction between the bodies is known as rolling friction.

Rolling friction coefficient,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 1

Laws of rolling friction :

  1. Rolling friction will develop a point contact between the surface and the rolling sphere. For objects like wheels line of contact will develop.
  2. Rolling friction(fr) has least value for given normal reaction when compared with static friction (fs) or kinetic friction (fk)
  3. Rolling friction is directly proportional
    to normal reaction, fr ∝ N.
  4. In rolling friction the surfaces in contact will get momentarily deformed a little.
  5. Rolling friction depends on area of contact. Due to this reason friction increases when air pressure is less in tyres (Flattened tyres).
  6. Rolling friction is inversely proportional to radius of rolling body µr ∝ \(\frac{1}{r}\)

Question 8.
Why is pulling the lawn roller preferred to pushing it?
Answer:
Let a lawn roller is pulled by means of a force F with some angle θ to the horizontal. By resolving the force into two components.

  1. Horizontal component F cos θ is useful to pull the body.
  2. The vertical component F sin θ opposes the weight

So N.R. = mg – F sin θ
But frictional force = µ. N.R.
∴ Frictional force [µ(mg – F sin θ)] decreases.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 2
So it is easier to pull the body.
When the lawn roller is pushed by a force, the vertical component F sin θ causes the apparent increase of weight of the object. So the normal reaction N.R. = mg + F sin θ.
∴ Frictional force [µ(mg + F sin θ)] increases and it will be difficult to pull the body.

Long Answer Questions

Question  1.
a) State Newton’s second law of motion. Hence, derive the equation of motion F = ma from it. [AP Mar. ’19, ’17, ’16; AP May ’17. ’16; May ’13]
b) A body is moving along a circular path such that its speed always remains constant. Should there be a force acting on the body?
Answer:
a) Newton’s 2nd law :
The rate of change of momentum of a body is proportional to external force and acts along the direction of force applied.
i.e., \(\frac{dp}{dt}\) ∝ F

Derivation of equation F = ma:
According Newton’s 2nd law.
We know
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 3
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 4
Here, k = constant.
The proportional constant is made equal to one, by properly selecting the unit of force.
∴ F = ma

b) Force on a body moving in a circular path :
Let a body of mass’m’ is moving in a circular path of radius V with constant speed. The velocity of the body is given by the tangent drawn at that point. Since velocity is changing continuously the body will have acceleration.

So the body will experience some acceleration. This is called normal acceleration (or) centripetal acceleration.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 2.
Define Angle of friction and Angle of repose. Show that angle of friction is equal to angle of repose for a rough inclined plane.
A block of mass 4 kg is resting on a rough horizontal plane and is about to move when a horizontal force of 30 N is applied on it. If g = 10 m/s². Find the total contact force exerted by the plane on the block.
Answer:
Angle of friction :
The angle made by the resultant of the Normal reaction and the limiting friction with Normal reaction is called angle of friction (Φ).

Angle of reppse :
Let a body of mass m is placed on a rough inclined plane. Let the angle with the horizontal ‘θ’ is gradually increased then fora particular angle of inclination (say α) the body will just slide down without acceleration. This angle θ = α is called angle of repose. At this stage the forces acting on the body are in equilibrium.

Equation for angle of repose :
Force acting on the body in vertically downward direction = W = mg.
By resolving this force into two components.

  1. Force acting along the inclined plane in downward direction = mg sin θ.
    This component is responsible for downward motion.
  2. The component mg cos θ . which is balanced by the normal reaction.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 5
If the body slides down without acceleration resultant force on the body is zero, then
mg sin θ = Frictional force (fk)
mg cos θ = Normal reaction (N.R.)
But coefficient friction
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 6
Hence θ = α is called angle of repose.
∴ µk = tan α

Hence tangent of angle of repose (tan θ) is equal to coefficient of friction (fk) between the bodies.

b) When the block rests on the horizontal surface, it is in equilibrium under the action of four forces. They are
i) Normal reaction (N)
ii) Weight of the block (mg)
iii) Horizontal force (30 N)
iv) Limiting frictional force (fL)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 7

If the applied horizontal force is equal to the limiting frictional force, then only the block will be ready to move on the rough horizontal surface, i.e., fL = horizontal force applied.
∴ Total contact force = 30 N.

Problems

Question 1.
The linear momentum of a particle as a function of time ‘t’ is given by, p = a + bt, where a and b are positive constants. What is the force acting on the particle?
Solution:
Linear momentum of a particle, p = a + bt
We know that force acting on a particle is equal to rate of change of linear momentum.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 8

Question 2.
Calculate the time needed for a net force of 5 N to change the velocity of a 10 kg mass by 2 m/s. [TS May ’16]
Solution:
Force, F = 5N
Change in velocity, v – u = 2ms -1
Mass, m= 10 kg
From Newton’s second law of motion,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 9

Question 3.
A ball of mass ‘m’ is thrown vertically upward from the ground and reaches a height ‘h’ before momentarily coming to rest, If ‘g’ is acceleration due to gravity. What is the impulse received by the ball due to gravity force during its flight?
Solution:
Impulse, J = force × time
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 10

Question 4.
A constant force acting on a body of mass 3.0 kg changes its speed from 2.0 m s-1 to 3.5 m s-1 in 25 s. The direction of motion of the body remains unchanged. What is the magnitude and direction of the force?
Solution:
Mass of the body, m = 3.0 kg ;
Initial velocity of the body, u = 2.0 ms-1
Final velocity of the body, v = 3.5 ms-1
Time, t = 25 s
From Newton s second law of motion,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 11
∴ Magnitude of force acting on the body, F = 0.18 N. The direction of force acting on the body is along the direction of motion of the body because force is positive.

Question 5.
A man in a lift feels an apparent weight ‘W’ when the lift is moving up with a uniform acceleration of 1/3rd of the acceleration due to gravity. If the same man was in the same lift now moving down with a uniform acceleration that is 1/2 of the acceleration due to gravity, then what is his apparent weight?
Solution:
Case (i) :
When lift is moving upwards :
Apparent weight of the man = W
Acceleration, a = g/3
Apparent weight of the man when the lift is moving upwards is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 12

Case (ii) : When lift is moving downwards:
Let W’ be the apparent weight of the man Acceleration, a = g/2
Apparent weight of the man when the lift is moving downwards is,
W’ = m(g – a) = m (g – g/2)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 13

Question 6.
A container of mass 200 kg rests on the back of an open truck. If the truck accelerates at 1.5 m/s², what is the minimum coefficient of static friction between the container and the bed of the truck required to prevent the container from sliding off the back of the truck?
Solution:
Mass of the container, m = 200 kg
Acceleration of truck, a = 1.5 ms-2
Coefficient of static friction, µs = \(\frac{a}{g}\)
\(\frac{1.5}{9.8}\) = 0.153

Question 7.
A bomb initially at rest at a height of 40 m above the ground suddenly explodes into two identical fragments. One of them starts moving vertically downwards with an initial speed of 10m/s. If acceleration due to gravity is 10m/s², What is the separation between the fragments 2s after the explosion?
Solution:
Case (i): (for downward moving fragment)
Initial velocity, u = 10 ms-1
Acceleration, a = +g = 10 ms-2
Time, t = 2s
From the equation of motion, s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\) at²
the distance moved in downward direction is,
s1 = 10 × 2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 10 × (2)² = 40 m

Case (ii) (for upward moving fragment)
Given that two fragments are identical hence, after explosion the fragments move in opposite directions. Here the first fragment moves in downward direction, hence, second fragment moves upward direction.
Again from s = ut = \(\frac{1}{2}\)at² we can write,
s2 = – 10 × 2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 10 × 4 = -20 + 20 = 0m
∴ Separation between the fragments 2s after the explosion = S1 ~ S2 = 40 – 0 = 40m

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 8.
A fixed pulley with a smooth grove has a light string passing over it with a 4 kg attached on one side and a 3 kg on the other side. Another 3 kg is hung from the other 3 kg as shown with another light string. If the system is released from rest, find the common acceleration? (g = 10 m/s²)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 14
Solution:
Here, m1 = 3 + 3 = 6 kg; m2 = 4 kg ;
g = 10 ms-2

Acceleration of the system,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 15

Question 9.
A block of mass of 2 kg slides on an inclined plane that makes an angle of 30° with the horizontal. The coefficient of friction between the block and the surface is √3/2.
a) What force should be applied to the block so that it moves down without any acceleration?
b) What force should be applied to the block so that it moves up without any acceleration?
Solution:
Mass of the block, m = 2kg
Angle of inclination, θ = 30°
Coefficient of friction between the block and the surface, µ = \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)

a) The required force to move the block down without acceleration is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 16
b) The required force to move the block up without any acceleration is,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 17

Question 10.
A block is placed on a ramp of parabolic shape given by the equation y = x²/20, sec Figure.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 18
If µs = 0.5, what is the maximum height above the ground at which the block can be placed without slipping?
(tan θ = µs = \(\frac{dy}{dx}\))
Solution:
For the body not to drop
mg cos θ = µ mg sin θ
⇒ tan θ = µ given µ = 0.5 dy
But tan θ = \(\frac{dy}{dx}\) slope of parabolic region
⇒ \(\frac{dy}{dx}\) = µ = 0.5 …………… (1)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 19

Question 11.
A block of metal of mass 2 kg on a horizontal table is attached to a mass of 0.45 kg by a light string passing over a frictionless pulley at the edge of the table. The block is subjected to a horizontal force by allowing the 0.45 kg mass to fall. The coefficient of sliding friction between the block and table is 0.2.
Calculate (a) the initial acceleration, (b) the tension in the string, (c) the distance the block would continue to move if, after 2 s of motion, the string should break.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 20
Solution:
Mass of first block, m1 = 0.45kg
Mass of second block, m2 = 2 kg
coefficient of slidding friction between the block and table, µ = 0.2

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 21
b) Tension in the string
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 22

c) Velocity of string after 2 sec = u in this case; u’ = 0
∴ u = u’ + at = 0 + 0.2 × 2 = 0.4 m/s
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 23

Question 12.
On a smooth horizontal surface, a block A of mass 10 kg is kept. On this block, a second block B of mass 5 kg is kept. The coefficient of friction between the two blocks is 0.4. A horizontal force of 30 N is applied on the lower block as shown. The force of friction between the blocks is (take g = 10 m/s²)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 24
Solution:
Mass of block ‘A’ is, mA = 10 kg
Mass of block ‘B’ is, mB = 5 kg
Applied horizontal force, F = 30 N
Coefficient of friction between two blocks, µ = 0.4

Frictional force of block ‘B’ is f = µmg
⇒ f = 0.4 × 5 × 10 = 20N
∴ The frictional force acting between the two blocks, = F – f = 30 – 20 = 10 N

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 13.
A batsman hits back a ball straight in the direction of the bowler without changing its initial speed of 12 ms-1. If the mass of the ball is 0.15 kg., determine the impulse imparted to the ball. (Assume linear motion of the ball). [AP Mar. ’17]
Solution:
Impulse = change in momentum
= (0.15 × 12) – (- 0.15 × 12) = 3.6 NS
in the direction from the batsman to the bowler.

Question 14.
A force \(2\overline{\mathrm{i}}+\overline{\mathrm{j}}-\overline{\mathrm{k}}\) Newton acts on a body which is initially at rest. At the end of 20 seconds the velocity of the body is \(4\overline{\mathrm{i}}+2\overline{\mathrm{j}}-2\overline{\mathrm{k}}\) m/s. What is the mass of the body? [AP May ’16]
Answer:
Force F = \(2\overline{\mathrm{i}}+\overline{\mathrm{j}}-\overline{\mathrm{k}}\), time t = 20 sec.
Initial velocity u0 = 0.
Final velocity U = \(4\overline{\mathrm{i}}+2\overline{\mathrm{j}}-2\overline{\mathrm{k}}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 25

Additional Problems

Question 1.
A constant retarding force of 50 N is applied to a body of mass 20 kg moving initially with a speed of 15 ms-1. How long does the body take to stop?
Solution:
Here, F = – 50N, m = 20 kg
u = 15 ms-1, v = 0, t = ?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 26

Question 2.
A body of mass 5 kg is acted upon by two perpendicular forces 8 N and 6 N. Give the magnitude and direction of the acceleration of the body.
Solution:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 27
This is the direction of resultant force and hence the direction of acceleration of the body as shown in figure.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 28

Question 3.
The driver of a three-wheeler moving with a speed of 36 km / h sees a child standing in the middle of the road and brings his vehicle to rest in 4.0 s just in time to save the child. What is the average retarding force on the vehicle ? The mass of the three wheeler is 400 kg and the mass of the driver is 65 kg.
Solution:
Here, u = 36 km/h = 10 m/s, v = 0, t = 4s
m = 400 + 65 = 465 kg
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 29

Question 4.
A rocket with a lift-off mass 20,000 kg is blasted upwards with an initial acceleration of 5.0 ms-2. Calculate the initial thrust (force) of the blast.
Solution:
Here, m = 20000 kg = 2 × 104 kg
Initial acceleration, a = 5 ms-2;
Thrust, F = ?

Clearly, the thrust should be such that it overcomes the force of gravity besides giving it an upward acceleration of 5 ms-2.

Thus the force should produce a net acceleration of 9.8 + 5.0 = 14.8 ms-2.
As thrust = force = mass × acceleration
∴ F = 2 × 104 × 14.8 = 2.96 × 105N

Question 5.
A man of mass 70 kg stands on a weighing scale in a lift which is moving
a) upwards with a uniform speed of 10 ms-1,
b) downwards with a uniform acceleration of 5 ms-2,
c) upwards with a uniform acceleration of 5 ms-2,
What would be the readings on the scale in each case?
d) What would be the reading if the lift mechanism failed and it hurtled down freely under gravity?
Solution:
Here, m = 70 kg, g = 10 m/s²
The weighing machine in each case measures the reaction R i.e., the apparent weight.
a) When the lift moves upwards with a uniform speed, its acceleration is zero.
R = mg = 70 × 10 = 700 N

b) When the lift moves downwards with a = 5 ms-2
R = m(g – a) = 70 (10 – 5) = 350 N

c) When the lift moves upwards with a = 5 ms-2
R = m (g + a) = 70 (10 + 5) = 1050 N

d) If the lift were to come down freely under gravity, downward acceleration. a = g
∴ R = m (g – a) = m (g – g) = Zero.

Question 6.
Two bodies of masses 10 kg and 20 kg respectively kept on a smooth, horizontal surface are tied to the ends of a light string, a horizontal force F = 600 N is applied to (i) A, (ii) B along the direction of string. What is the tension in the string in each case?
Solution:
Here, F = 600 N m1= 10 kg, m2 = 20 kg
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 30

Let T be the tension in the string and a be the acceleration of the system, in the direction of force applied.
∴ a = \(\frac{F}{m_1+m_2}=frac{600}{10+20}\) = 20 m/s²

i) When force is applied on lighter block A, Fig (i).
T = m2 a = 20 × 20 N’= 400 N

ii) When force is applied on heavier block B, Fig (ii).
T = m1a = 10 × 20 NT = 200 N
Which is different from value of T in case (i). Hence our answer depends on which mass end, the force is applied.

Question 7.
Two masses 8 kg and 12 kg are connected at the two ends of a light in extensible string that goes over a frictionless pulley. Find the acceleration of the masses, and the tension in the string when the masses are released.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 31
Solution:
Here, m2 = 8kg, ; m1 = 12 kg
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 32

Question 8.
A nucleus is at rest in the laboratory frame of reference. Show that if it disintegrates into two smaller nuclei the products must move in opposite directions.
Solution:
Let m1, m2 be the masses of products and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v_1}},\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v_2}}\) be their respective velocities. Therfore, total linear momentum after disintegration = \(m_1\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v_1}}+m_2\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v_2}}\). Before disintegra-tion, the nucleus is at rest. Therefore, its linear momentum before disintegration is zero.

According to the principle of conservation of linear momentum,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 33

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 9.
Two billiard balls each of mass 0.05 kg moving in opposite directions with speed 6 ms-1 collide and rebound with the same speed. What is the impulse imparted to each ball due to the other?
Solution:
Here, initial momentum of the ball
A = 0.05 (6) = 0.3 kg ms-1

As the speed is reversed on collision, final momentum of the ball A = 0.05 (-6)
= – 0.3 kg ms-1

Impulse imparted to ball A = change in momentum of ball A = final momentum – initial momentum = – 0.3 – 0.3 = – 0.6 kg ms-1.

Question 10.
A shell of mass 0.02 kg is fired by a gun of mass 100 kg. If the muzzle speed of the shell is 80 ms-1, what is the recoil speed of the gun?
Solution:
Here, mass of shell, m = 0.02 kg
mass of gun, M = 100 kg
muzzle speed of shell, V = 80 ms-1
recoil speed of gun, v = ?
According to the principle of conservation of linear momentum, mV + Mυ = 0
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 34

Question 11.
A stone of mass 0.25 kg tied to the end of a string is whirled round in a circle of radius 1.5 m with a speed of 40 rev./min in a horizontal plane. What is the tension in the string? What is the maximum speed with which the stone can be whirled around if the string can withstand a maximum tension of 200 N?
Solution:
Here, m = 0.25 kg, r = 1.5 m ;
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 35

Question 12.
Explain why
a) a horse cannot pull a cart and run in empty space,
b) passengers are thrown forward from their seats when a speeding bus stops suddenly,
c) it is easier to pull a lawn mover than to push it,
d) a cricketer moves his hands backwards while holding a catch.
Solution:
a) While trying to pull a cart, a horse pushes the ground backwards with a certain force at an angle. The ground offers an equal reaction in the opposite direction, on the feet of the horse. The forward component of this reaction is responsible for motion of the cart. In empty space, there is no reaction and hence, a horse cannot pull the cart and run.

b) This is due to “inertia of motion”.
When the speeding bus stops suddenly, lower part of the bodies in contact with the seats stop. The upper part of the bodies of the passengers tend to maintain the uniform motion. Hence, the passengers are thrown forward.

c) While pulling a lawn mover, force is applied upwards along the handle. The vertical component of this force is upwards and reduces the effective weight of the mover, Fig (a). While pushing a lawn mover, force is applied downwards along the handle. The vertical component of this force is downwards and increases the effective weight of the mover, Fig (b). As the effective weight is lesser in case of pulling than in case of pushing, therefore, “pulling is easier than pushing”.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 36

d) While holding a catch, the impulse received by the hands, F × t = change in linear momentum of the ball is constant. By moving his hands backwards, the cricketer increases the time of impact (t) to complete the catch. As t increases, F decreases and as a reaction, his hands are not hurt severely.

Question 13.
A stream of water flowing horizontally with a speed of 15 ms-1 pushes out of a tube of cross-sectional area 10-2 m², and hits a vertical wall nearby. What is the force exerted on the wall by the impact of water, assuming it does not rebound?
Solution:
Here, v = 15 ms-1
Area of cross section, a = 10-2
Volume of water pushing out/sec = a × v
= 10-2 × 15 m³ s-1

As density of water is 10³ kg/m³, therefore, mass of water striking the wall per sec.
m = (15 × 10-2) × 10³ = 150 kg/s.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 37

Question 14.
Ten one-rupee coins are put on top of each other on a table. Each coin has a mass m.
Give the magnitude and direction of
a) the force on the 7th coin (counted from the bottom) due to all the coins on its top,
b) the force on the 7th coin by the eighth coin,
c) the reaction of the 6th coin on the 7th coin.
Solution:
a) The force on 7th coin is due to weight of the three coins lying above it. Therefore,
F = (3 m) kgf = (3 mg) N
where g is acceleration due to gravity. This force acts vertically downwards.

b) The eighth coin is already under the weight of two coins above it and it has its own weight too. Hence force on 7th coin due to 8th coin is sum of the two forces i.e.
F = 2m + m = (3m) kgf = (3 mg) N
The force acts vertically downwards.

c) The sixth coin is under the weight of four coins above it.
Reaction, r = -F = -4m (kgf) = – (4 mg) N

Minus sign indicates that the reaction acts vertically upwards, opposite to the weight.

Question 15.
An aircraft executes a horizontal loop at a speed of 720 km/h with its wings banked at 15°. What is the radius of the loop?
Solution:
Here θ = 15°
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 38

Question 16.
A train runs along an unbanked circular track of radius 30 m at a speed of 54 km/h. The mass of the train is 106 kg. What provides the centripetal force required for this purpose – The engine or the rails? What is the angle of banking required to prevent wearing out of the rail?
Solution:
The centripetal force is provided by the lateral thrust exerted by the rails on the wheels. By Newton’s 3rd law, the train exerts an equal and opposite thrust on the rails causing its wear and tear.

Obviously, the outer rail will wear out faster due to the larger force exerted by the train on it.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 39

Question 17.
A block of mass 25 kg is raised by a 50 kg man in two different ways as shown in Fig. What is the action on the floor by the man in the two cases? If the floor yields to a normal force of 700 N, which mode should the man adopt to lift the block without the floor yielding?
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 40
Solution:
Here, mass of block, m = 25 kg
Mass of man, M = 50 kg
Force applied to lift the block
F = mg = 25 × 9.8 = 245 N
Weight of man W = Mg = 50 × 9.8 = 490 N.

a) When block is raised by man as shown in Fig. (a), force is applied by the man in the upward direction. This increases the apparent weight of the man. Hence action on the floor.
W’ = W + F = 490 + 245 = 735 N

b) When block is raised by man as shown in Fig. (b), force is applied by the man in the downward direction. This decreases the apparent weight of the man. Hence, action on the floor in this case would be W’ = W – F = 490 – 245 = 245 N.

As the floor yields to a normal force 700 N, the mode (b) has to be adopted by the man to lift the block.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 18.
A monkey of mass 40 kg climbs on a rope (Fig) which can stand a maximum tension of 600 N. In which of the following cases will the rope break : the monkey {LAWS OF MOTION )
a) climbs up with an acceleration of 6 ms-2
b) climbs down with an acceleration of 4 ms-2
c) climbs up with a uniform speed of 5 ms-1
d) falls down the rope nearly freely under gravity?
(Ignore the mass of the rope).
Solution:
Here, mass of monkey, m = 40 kg
Maximum tension the rope can stand, T = 600 N.
In each case, actual tension in the rope will be equal to apparent weight of monkey (R), The rope will break when R exceeds T.
a) When monkey climbs up with a = 6 ms-2,
R = m (g + a) = 40 (10 + 6) = 640 N (which is greater than T).
Hence the rope will break.

b) When monkey climbs down with a = 4 ms-2
R = m (g – a) = 40 (10 – 4) = 240 N, which is less than T
∴ The rope will not break.

c) When monkey climbs up with a uniform speed v = 5 ms-1,
its acceleration a = 0 ∴ R = mg = 40 × 10 = 400 N, which is less than T
∴ The rope will not break.

d) When monkey falls down the rope nearly freely under gravity, a = g
∴ R = m (g – a) = m (g – g) = 0 (Zero.)
Hence the rope will not break.

Question 19.
A 70 kg man stands in contact against the inner wall of a hollow cylindrical drum of radius 3 in rotating about its vertical axis with 200 rev/min. The coefficient of friction between the wall and his clothing is 0.15. What is the minimum rotational speed of the cylinder to enable the man to remain stuck to the wall (without falling) when the floor is suddenly removed?
Solution:
Here, m = 70 kg, r = 3 m
n = 200, rpm = \(\frac{200}{60}\) rps, p = 0.15, ω = ?

The horizontal force N by the wall on the man provides the necessary centripetal force = m r ω². The frictional force (f) in this case is vertically upwards opposing the weight (mg) of the man.

After the floor is removed, the man will remain stuck to the wall, when mg = f < µ N, i.e. mg < µ m r ω² or g < µ r ω²
∴ Minimum angular speed of rotation of
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 41

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion

Question 20.
A thin circular loop of radius R rotates about its vertical diameter with an angular frequency ω. Show that a small bead on the wire loop remains at its lowermost point for to ω ≤ √g/R. What is the angle made by the radius vector joining the centre to the bead with the vertical downward direction for to ω = √2g/R? Neglect friction.
Solution:
In Figure we have shown that radius vector joining the bead to the centre of the wire makes an angle 0 with the verticle downward direction. If N is normal reaction, then as is clear from the figure,
mg = N cos θ —- (i)
m r ω² = N sin θ —- (ii)
or m (R sin θ) ω² = N sin θ or m R ω² = N
from (i), mg = m R ω² cos θ or
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 5 Laws of Motion 42

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 4th Lesson Motion in a Plane Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 4th Lesson Motion in a Plane

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Write the equation for the horizontal range covered by a projectile and specify when it will be maximum. [TS May ’16]
Answer:
Range of a projectile (R) = \(\frac{u^2 \sin 2 \theta}{g}\)
When θ = 45° Range is maximum.
Maximum Range (Rmax) = \(\frac{u^2}{g}\)

Question 2.
The vertical component of a vector is equal to its horizontal component. What is the angle made by the vector with x-axis? [AP Mar. ’19; TS May ’18]
Answer:
Let R be a vector.
Vertical component = R sin θ;
Horizontal component = R cos θ
∴ R sin θ = R cos θ.
So sin θ = cos θ ⇒ θ = 45°

Question 3.
A vector V makes an angle θ with the horizontal. The vector is rotated through an angle α. Does this rotation change the vector V?
Answer:
Magnitude of vector = V ;
Let initial angle with horizontal = θ
Angle rotated = α
So new angle with horizontal = θ + α
Now horizontal component,
Vα = V cos (θ + α)
Vertical component, Vy = V sin (θ + α)
Magnitude of vector, V = \(\sqrt{V^{2}_{x}+V^{2}_{y}}\) = V
So rotating the vector does not change its magnitude.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 4.
Two forces of magnitudes 3 units and 5 units act at 60° with each other. What is the magnitude of their resultant? [AP Mar. 17. 15; May 17, 16]
Answer:
Given \(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\) = 3 units, \(\overline{\mathrm{Q}}\) = 5 units and θ = 60°
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 1

Question 5.
A = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}\) What is the angle between the vector and x-axis? [TS Mar. ’17; AP Mar. ’14; May ’13]
Answer:
Given that, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 2
If ‘θ’ is the angle made by the vector with x-axis then,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 3

Question 6.
When two right angled vectors of magnitude 7 units and 24 units combine, what is the magnitude of their resultant? [AP Mar. 18, 16; May 18. 14]
Answer:
Given \(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\) = 7 units; \(\overline{\mathrm{Q}}\) = 24 units; 0 = 90°
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 4

Question 7.
If \(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\) = 2i + 4j + 14k and \(\overline{\mathrm{Q}}\) = 4i + 4j + 10k, find the magnitude of \(\overline{\mathrm{P}}+\overline{\mathrm{Q}}\). [TS Mar. ’16, ’15]
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 5

Question 8.
Can a vector of magnitude zero have non-zero components?
Answer:
A vector with zero magnitude cannot have non-zero components. Because magnitude of given vector \(\overline{\mathrm{V}}\) = \(\sqrt{V^{2}_{x}+V^{2}_{y}}\) must be zero. This is possible only when V²x and V²y are zero.

Question 9.
What is the acceleration of a projectile at the top of its trajectory? [TS Mar. ’19]
Answer:
At highest point acceleration, a = g. In projectile, motion acceleration will always acts towards centre of earth. It is irrespective of its position, whether it is at highest point or somewhere.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 10.
Can two vectors of unequal magnitude add up to give the zero vector? Can three unequal vectors add up to give the zero vector?
Answer:
No. Two unequal vectors can never give zero vector by addition. But three unequal vectors when added may give zero vector.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State parallelogram law of vectors. Derive an expression for the magnitude and direction of the resultant vector. [TS Mar. ’17, ’16, May ’17; AP Mar. ’14, ’13]
Answer:
Parallelogram Law :
If two vectors are represented by the two adjacent sides of a parallelogram then the diagonal passing through the intersection of given vectors represents their resultant both in direction and magnitude.

Proof :
Let \(\overline{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{Q}}\) be two adjacent vectors ‘θ’ be angle between them. Construct a parallelogram OACB as shown in figure. Extend the line OA and draw a normal D from C. The diagonal OC = the resultant \(\overline{\mathrm{R}}\) both in direction and magnitude.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 6

In figure OCD = right angle triangle
⇒ OC = OD² + DC²
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 7
Angle of resultant with adjacent side ‘α’
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 8

Question 2.
What is relative motion? Explain it.
Answer:
Relative velocity is the velocity of a body with respect to another moving body.

Relative velocity in two dimensional motion :
Let two bodies A and B are moving with velocities \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_A\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_B\) then relative velocity of Aw.r.t B is \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{AB}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{A}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{B}\)
Relative velocity of B w.r.t. A is
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{BA}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{B}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_{A}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 9
Procedure to find resultant :
To find rela-tive velocity in two dimensional motion use vectorial subtraction of VA or VB. Generally to find relative velocity one vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_A\) or \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_B\) is reversed (as the case may be) and parallelogram is constructed. Now resultant of that parallelogram is equal to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_A-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_B\) or \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_B-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_A\) (8° one vector is reversed VA is taken as –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_A\) or \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_B\) is taken as –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}_B\))
In figure relative velocity of B w.r.t A is VBA =VR = VB – VA.

Question 3.
Show that a boat must move at an angle with respect to river water in order to cross the river in minimum time.
Answer:
Motion of a boat in a river :
Let a boat can travel with a speed of VbE in still water w.r. to earth. It is used to cross a river which flows with a speed of VWE with respect to earth. Let width of river is W.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 10

We can cross the river in two different ways.
1) in shortest path 2) in shortest time.

To cross the river in shortest time :
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 11

To cross the river in shortest time boat must be rowed along the width of river i.e., boat must be rowed perpendicular to the bank or 90° with the flow of water. Because width of river is the shortest distance. So velocity must be taken in that direction to obtain shortest time. In this case VbE and VWE are perpendicular and boat will travel along AC. The distance BC is called drift. So to cross the river in shortest time angle with flow of water = 90°.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 4.
Define unit vector, null vector and position vector. [AP June ’15]
Answer:
Unit vector :
A vector whose magnitude is one unit is called unit vector.

Let a is \(\overline{\mathrm{a}}\) given vector then unit vector
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 12

Null vector :
A vector whose magnitude is zero is called null vector. But it has direction.

For a null vector the origin and terminal point are same.
Ex : Let \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\times\overline{\mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{0}}\) . Here magnitude of \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\times\overline{\mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{0}}\) . But still it has direction perpendicular to the plane of \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\).

Position vector :
Any vector in space can be represented by the linear combination
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 13

Question 5.
If |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{b}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{b}}\)|, prove that the angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{b}}\) is 90°. [TS Mar., May ’18]
Answer:
Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{b}}\) are the two vectors.
Sum of vectors
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 14
by squaring on both sides,
a² + b² + 2ab cos θ = a² + b² – 2ab cos θ
∴ 4 ab cos θ = 0 or θ = 90°
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 15

Question 6.
Show that the trajectory of an object thrown at certain angle with the horizontal is a parabola. [AP Mar. ’18, ’17. ’16. ’15, May ’18, ’17, ’14. ’13; June ’15; TS Mar. ’18, ’15, May ’16, June ’15]
Answer:
Projectile :
A body thrown into the air same angle with the horizontal, (other tan 90°) its motion under the influence of gravity is called projectile. The path followed by it is called trajectory.

Let a body is projected from point O, with velocity ‘u’ at an angle θ with horizontal. The velocity u’ can be resolved into two rectangular components ux and uy along x-axis and y-axis.
ux = u cos θ and uy = u sin θ

After time t, Horizontal distance travelled x = u cos θ . t ……….. (1)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 16
After a time t’ sec; vertical displacement
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 17
The above equation represents “parabola”. Hence the path of a projectile is a parabola.

Question 7.
Explain the terms the average velocity and instantaneous velocity. When are they equal ?
Answer:
Average velocity :
It is the ratio of total displacement to total time taken.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 18

Average velocity is independent of path followed by the particle. It just deals with initial and final positions of the body.

Instantaneous velocity :
Velocity of a body at any particular instant of time is defined as instantaneous velocity.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 19
as instantaneous velocity.
For a body moving with uniform velocity its average velocity = Instantaneous velocity.

Question 8.
Show that the maximum height and range
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 20
respectively where the terms have their regular meanings.
Answer:
Let a body is projected with an initial velocity ‘u’ and with an angle θ to the horizontal. Initial velocity along x direction, ux = u cos θ Initial velocity along y direction, uy = u sin θ

Horizontal Range :
It is the distance covered by projectile along the horizontal between the point of projection to the point on ground, where the projectile returns again.

It is denoted by R. The horizontal distance covered by the projectile in the to time of flight is called horizontal range. Therefore, R = u cos θ × t.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 21

Angle of projection for maximum range:
For a given velocity of projection, the horizontal range will be maximum, when sin 2θ = 1.
∴ Angle of projection for maximum range is 2θ = 90° or θ = 45°
∴ Rmax = \(\frac{u^2}{g}\)

Maximum height :
The vertical distance covered by the projectile until its vertical component becomes zero.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 22

Question 9.
If the trajectory of a body is parabolic in one reference frame, can it be parabolic in another reference frame that moves at constant velocity with respect to the first reference frame? If the trajectory can be other than parabolic, what else can it be?
Answer:
Yes. According to Newton’s first law, a body at rest or a body moving with uniform velocity are treated as same. Both of them belong to inertial frame of reference.

If a frame (say 1) is moving with uniform velocity with respect to other, then that second frame must be at rest or it maintains a constant velocity w.r.t the first. So both frames are inertial frames. So if trajectory of a body in one frame is a parabola, then trajectory of that body in another frame is also a parabola.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 10.
A force 2i + j – k newton acts on a body which is initially at rest. At the end of 20 seconds the velocity of the body is 4i + 2j – 2k ms-1. What is the mass of the body? [AP May ’16]
Answer:
Force, F = 2i + j – k
time, t = 20
Initial velocity, u = 0
Final velocity, v = 4i + 2j – 2k = 2(2i + j – k)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 23

Problems

Question 1.
Ship A is 10 km due west of ship B. Ship A is heading directly north at a speed of 30 km/h, while ship B is heading in a direction 60° west of north at a speed of 20 km/h.
(i) Determine the magnitude of the
(ii) What will be their distance of closest approach?
Answer:
Velocity of A = 30 kmph due North
∴ VA = 30\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\)
Velocity of B = 20 kmph 60° west of North
∴ VB = -20sin60° + 20 cos60° = 10√3\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 10\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 24
Shortest distance :
In ∆le ANB shortest distance, AN = AB sin θ
But distance, AB = 10 km
∴ AN = 10 × \(\frac{20}{10\sqrt{7}}=\frac{20}{\sqrt{7}}\) = 7.56 km

Question 2.
If θ is the angle of projection, R the range, h the maximum height, T the time of flight, then show that (a) tan θ = 4h/R and (b)h = gT²/8
Answer:
(a) Given angle of projection = θ,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 25
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 26

Question 3.
A projectile is fired at an angle of 60° to the horizontal with an initial velocity of 800 m/s:
(i) Find the time of flight of the projectile before it hits the ground.
(ii) Find the distance it travels before it hits the ground (range).
(iii) Find the time of flight for the projectile to reach its maximum height.
Answer:
Angle of projection, θ = 60°.
Initial velocity, u = 800 m/s
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 27

iii) Time of flight to reach maximum height = \(\frac{T}{2}\)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 28

Question 4.
For a particle projected slantwise from the ground, the magnitude of its position vector with respect to the point of projection, when it is at the highest point of the path is found to be √2 times the maximum height reached by it. Show that the angle of projection is tan-1 (2).
Answer:
Position vector of h (max point) from 0, is
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 29

Question 5.
An object is launched from a cliff 20. m above the ground at an angle of 30° above the horizontal with an initial speed of 30 m/s. How far horizontally does the object travel before landing on the ground? (g = 10 m/s²)
Answer:
Height of cliff = 20m
Angle of projection, θ = 30°
Velocity of projection, u = 30 m/s
Total horizontal distance travelled = OC = OB’ + B’C
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 30

b) Distance B’C = Range of a horizontal projectile.
∴ Range = u cos θ t
u. cos θ = 30.\(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\) = 15√3 .
Time taken to reach the ground, t = ?
Given Sy = 20, uy = u sin θ = 30 sin 30° = 15 m/s
∴ Sy = 20 = 15t + \(\frac{10}{2}\)t² ⇒ 5t² + 15t – 20 = 0
or t² + 3t – 4 = 0 or (t + 4) (t – 1) = 0
∴ t = – 4 or t = 1 ∴ t is Not – ve use t = 1
∴ Range = 4 . cos θ . t = 15√3 → (2)
Total distance travelled before reaching the ground = 45√3 +15√3 = 60√3 m.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 6.
‘O’ is a point on the ground chosen as origin. A body first suffers a displacement of 10√2 mm North-East, next 10 m North and finally 10√2 North-West. How far it is from origin? [TS Mar. ’19]
Answer:
a) 10√2 m North-East
b) 10m North
c) 10√2 m North-West
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 31
From figure total displacement from origin ‘O’ is OC
ButOC = OA’ + A’B’ + B’C =10 + 10 + 10 = 30 m.

Question 7.
From a point on the ground a particle is projected with initial velocity u, such that its horizontal range is maximum. Find the magnitude of average velocity during its ascent.
Answer:
Velocity of projection = u.
Range is maximum ⇒ θ = 45°
During time of ascent ⇒ when h = hmax
⇒ ux = Vx = u . cos θ

Average velocity, VA = \(\sqrt{V^{2}_{x}+V^{2}_{y}}\)
Vx = Average velocity along x-axis
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 32
Average velocity during time of ascent
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 33

Question 8.
A particle is projected from the ground with some initial velocity making an angle of 45° with the horizontal. It reaches a height of 7.5 m above the ground while it travels a horizontal distance of 10 m from the point of projection. Find the initial speed of projection (g = 10 m/s2).
Anwser:
Angle of projection = 45°
Vertical height, hy = 7.5 m
Horizontal distance, hx = 10 m
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 34

Question 9.
Wind is blowing from the south at 5 ms-1. To a cyclist it appears to be blowing from the east at 5 ms-1. Show that the velocity of the cyclist is ms-1 towards north-east.
Answer:
Direction of wind South to North 5 m/s.

Apparent direction is from East to West 5 m/s.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 35

This is relative velocity.
To find velocity of cyclist reverse the direction of resultant vector OB and find resultant
∴ Velocity of cyclist = \(\sqrt{5^2+^2+0}\) = 5√2 m/s

Question 10.
A person walking at 4 m/s finds rain drops falling slantwise into his face with a speed of 4 m/s at ah angle of 30° with the vertical. Show that the actual speed of the rain drops is 4 m/s.
Answer:
Velocity of man = 4 m/sec
Apparent velocity of rain drop = 4 m/sec with θ = 30° with vertical. This is relative velocity VB.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 36
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 37

Additional Problems

Question 1.
The ceiling of a long hall is 25 m high. What is the maximum horizontal distance that a ball thrown with a speed of 40 ms-1 can go without hitting the ceiling of the hall?
Solution:
Here, u = 40 ms-1; H = 25m, R = ?
Let θ be the angle of projection with the horizontal direction to have the maximum range, with maximum height = 25 m.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 38

Question 2.
A stone tied to the end of a string 80 cm long is whirled in a horizontal circle with a constant speed. If the stone makes 14 revolutions in 25 s, what is the magnitude and direction of acceleration of the stone?
Solution:
Here, r = 80 cm = 0.8 m; o = 14/25 s-1.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 39
The centripetal acceleration,
a = ω²r = (\(\frac{88}{25}\))² × 0.80 = 9.90m/s²
The direction of centripetal acceleration is along the string directed towards the centre of circular path.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 3.
An aircraft executes a horizontal loop of radius 1 km with a steady speed of 900 km/h. Compare its centripetal acceleration with the acceleration due to gravity.
Solution:
Here, r = 1 km = 1000 m;
v = 900 km h-1 = 900 × (1000m) × (60 × 60s)-1
= 250 ms-1
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 40

Question 4.
An aircraft is flying at a height of 3400 m above the ground. If the angle subtended at a ground observation point by the air-craft positions 10.0 s apart is 30°, what is the speed of the aircraft?
Solution:
In Fig, O is the observation point at the ground. A and B are the positions of aircraft for which ∠AOB = 30°. Draw a perpendicular OC on AB. Here OC = 3400 m and ∠AOC = ∠COB = 15°. Time taken by aircraft from A to B is 10 s.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 41

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane

Question 5.
A bullet fired at an angle of 30° with the horizontal hits the ground 3.0 km away. By adjusting its angle of projection, can one hope to hit a target 5.0 km away? Assume the muzzle speed to be fixed, and neglect air resistance.
Solution:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 4 Motion in a Plane 42
Since the muzzle velocity is fixed, therefore, Max. horizontal range,
Rmax = \(\frac{u^2}{g}\) = 2√3 = 3.464 m.
So, the bullet cannot hit the target.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 3rd Lesson Motion in a Straight Line Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 3rd Lesson Motion in a Straight Line

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
The states of motion and rest are relative. Explain.
Answer:
REST :
If the position of a body does not change with respect to surroundings, it is said to be at “rest”.

MOTION :
If the position of a body changes with respect to surroundings, it is said to be in “motion”.

By definitions rest and motion are relative with respect to surroundings.

Question 2.
How is average velocity different from instantaneous velocity? [AP Mar. 19, 13, May 17]
Answer:
Average velocity :
It is the ratio of total displacement to total time taken. It is independent of path of the body.

∴ Average velocity = \(\frac{\mathrm{s}_2-\mathrm{s}_1}{\mathrm{t}_2-\mathrm{t}_1}\)

Velocity of a particle at a particular instant of time is known as instantaneous velocity. Here time interval is very small.

Only in uniform motion, instantaneous velocity = average velocity. For all other cases instantaneous velocity may differ from average velocity.

Question 3.
Give an example where the velocity of an object is zero but its acceleration is not zero. [AP May ’17, Mar. ’13]
Answer:
In case of VPB at maximum height its velocity v = 0. But acceleration due to gravity ‘g’ is not zero.

So even though velocity v = 0 ⇒ acceleration is not zero.

Question 4.
A vehicle travels half the distance L with speed v1 and the other half with speed v2. What is the average speed?
Answer:
The average speed of a vehicle for the two equal parts.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 1

Question 5.
A lift coming down is just about to reach the ground floor. Taking the ground floor as origin and positive direction upwards for all quantities, which one of the following is correct?
a) x < 0, v < 0, a > 0
b) x > 0, v < 0, a < 0
c) x > 0, v < 0, a > 0
d) x > 0, v > 0, a > 0
Answer:
As the lift is coming down, the value of x become less hence negative, i.e., x < 0.

Velocity is downwards (i.e., negative). So v < 0. Just before reaching ground floor, lift is retarded, i.e., acceleration is upwards. Hence a > 0.

We can conclude that x < 0, v < 0 and a > 0.
∴ (a) is correct.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 6.
A uniformly moving cricket ball is hit with a bat for a very short time and is turned back. Show the variation of its acceleration with time taking the acceleration in the backward direction as positive.
Answer:
For a ball moving with uniform velocity acceleration is zero. But during time of contact between ball and bat acceleration is applied in opposite direction. The shape of acceleration – time graph is as shown.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 2

Question 7.
Give an example of one-dimensional motion where a particle moving along the positive x-direction comes to rest periodically and moves forward.
Answer:
When length of pendulum is high and amplitude is less then its motion is along a straight line. The pendulum will come to a stop at extreme position and moves back in forward direction (‘x’ + ve) periodically.

Question 8.
An object falling through a fluid is observed to have an acceleration given by a = g – bv, where g is the gravitational acceleration and b, is a constant. After a long time it is observed to fall with a constant velocity. What would be the value of this constant velocity?
Answer:
Acceleration, a = g – bv when moving with constant velocity, a = 0 ⇒ 0 = g – bv
∴ Constant velocity, v = \(\frac{g}{b}\) m/sec.

Question 9.
If the trajectory of a body is parabolic in one frame, can it be parabolic in another frame that moves with a constant velocity with respect to the first frame? If not, what can it be?
Answer:
If the trajectory of a body is parabolic with reference frames one and two then those two frames are of rest or moving with uniform velocity.

If they are not parabolic then for that reference frame it may be in straight line path.
Ex : When a body is dropped from a moving plane its path is parabolic for a person outside the plane. But for the pilot in the plane it is falling vertically downwards.

Question 10.
A spring with one end attached to a mass and the other to a rigid support is stretched and released. When is the magnitude of acceleration a maxium?
Answer:
Maximum restoring force setup in the spring, when stretched by a distance ’r’, is F = – kr

Potential energy of stretched spring = \(\frac{1}{2}\) kx²

As F ∝ r and this force is directed towards equilibrium position, hence if mass is left free, it will execute damped SHM due to gravity pull.

Magnitude of acceleration in the mass attached to one end of spring when just released is

a = \(\frac{F}{m}=\frac{-k}{m}\) r = (Maximum)

The magnitude of acceleration of the spring will be maximum when just released.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 11.
Define average velocity and average speed. When does the magnitude of average velocity become equal to the average speed?
Answer:
Average velocity :
It is defined as the ratio of total displacement to total time taken.

Average velocity
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 3

Average velocity is independent of path followed by the particle. It just deals with initial and final positions of the body. Average Speed: The ratio of total path length travelled to the total time taken is known as “average speed”.

Speed and average speed are scalar quantities so no direction for these quantities.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 4

When the body is along with the straight line its average velocity and average speed are equal.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Can the equations of kinematics be used when the acceleration varies with time? If not, what form would these equations take?
Answer:
a) The equations of motion are
1) v =u + at
2) s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\) at² and 3) v² – u² = 2as. All these three equations applicable body moves with uniform acceleration ‘a’.

No, the equations of are not applicable when the acceleration varies with time.

Question 2.
A particle moves in a straight line with uniform acceleration. Its velocity at time t = 0 is v1 and at time t2 = t is v2. The average velocity of the particle in this time interval is (v1 + v1)/ 2. Is this correct? Substantiate your answer.
Answer:
t1 = 0 ⇒ u = v1
t2 = t ⇒ v = v2

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 5

Question 3.
Can the velocity of an object be in a direction other than the direction of acceleration of the object? If so, give an example.
Answer:
Yes. Velocity of a body and its acceleration may be in different directions.

Explanation:

  1. Incase of vertically projected body ⇒ velocity of body is in the upward direction and acceleration is in a downward direction.
  2. When brakes are applied the velocity of body before coming to rest is opposite to retarding acceleration.

Question 4.
A parachutist flying in an aeroplane jumps when it is ata height of 3 km above ground. He opens his parachute when he is about 1 km above ground. Describe his motion.
Answer:
a) Height of fall before opening, h = 2 km
= 2000 m
∴ Velocity at a height of 1 km
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 6

b) After parachute is opened it touches the ground with almost zero velocity.
∴ u = 200 m/sec, v = 0, S = h = 1000 m From v² – u² = 2as
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 7
The Motion is as shown in figure.

Question 5.
A bird holds a fruit in its beak and flies parallel to the ground. It lets go of the fruit at some height. Describe the trajectory of the fruit as it falls to the ground as seen by (a) the bird (b) a person on the ground.
Answer:
a) As the bird is flying parallel to the ground, it possesses velocity in horizontal direction. Hence the fruit also possess velocity in horizontal direction and acceleration in downward direction. Hence the path of the fruit is a straight line with respect to the bird.

b) With respect to a person on the ground, the fruit seems to be in a parabolic path.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 6.
A man runs across the roof of a tall building and jumps horizontally on to the (lower) roof of an adjacent building. If his speed is 9 ms-1 and the horizontal distance between the buildings is 10 m and the height difference between the roofs is 9 m, will he be able to land on the next building? (take g = 10 ms-2) [TS Mar. ’18]
Answer:
Given that,
initial speed, u = 9 ms-1 ; g = 10m/s² height difference between the roofs, h = 9 m
horizontal distance between two buildings, d = 10 m
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 8

Range of the man = R = u × T = 9 × 1.341
= 12.069 m

Since R > d, the man will be able to land on the next building.

Question 7.
A ball is dropped from the roof of a tall building and simultaneously another ball is thrown horizontally with some velocity from the same roof. Which ball lands first? Explain your answer. [TS June ’15]
Answer:
Let ‘h’ be the height of the tall building.

For dropped ball:
Let ‘t1‘ be the time taken by the dropped ball to reach the ground.

Initial velocity, u = 0 ; Acceleration, a = + g
Distance travelled, s = h; Time of travel, t = t1

From the equation of motion, s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\) at²
we can write,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 9

For horizontally projected ball:
If the ball is thrown horizontally then its initial velocity along vertical direction is zero and in this case let ‘t2‘ be the time taken by the ball to reach the ground.
Again from the equation of motion,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 10

From equations (1) and (2) t1 = t2
i.e., both the balls reach the ground in the same time.

Question 8.
A ball is dropped from a building and simultaneously another ball is projected upward with some velocity. Describe the change in relative velocities of the balls as a function of time.
Answer:
a) For a body dropped from building its velocity, v1 = gt → (1) (∵ u1 = 0)

b) For a body thrown up with a velocity ‘u’ its velocity, v2 = u – gt → (2)
∵ The two balls are moving in opposite direction the relative velocity,
VR = v1 + v2
∴ vR =gt + u – gt = u

Here the relative velocity remains constant, but velocity of one body increases at a rate of g’ m/sec and velocity of another body decreases at a rate of ‘g’m/sec.

Question 9.
A typical raindrop is about 4 mm in diameter. If a raindrop falls from a cloud which is at 1 km above the ground, estimate its momentum when it hits the ground.
Answer:
Diameter, D = 4 m
⇒ radius, r = 2mm = 2 × 10-3 m
mass of rain drop = volume × density = \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr³ × 1000 m
(∵ mass of one m³ of water = 1000 kg)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 11

Question 10.
Show that the maximum height reached by a projectile launched at an angle of 45° is one quarter of its range. [AP May ’16, Mar. ’14]
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 12
∴ When θ = 45° maximum height reached is one quarter of maximum range.

Question 11.
Derive the. equation of motion x = v0t + \(\frac{1}{2}\) at² using appropriate graph. [TS Mar. ’19, May ’16]
Answer:
The velocity-time graph of a body moving with initial velocity u’ and with uniform acceleration a’ as shown. Let ‘v’ be the velocity of the body after a time t.

In v – t graph area of velocity-time graph = total displacement travelled by it. Area under velocity – time graph = area of OABCD
∴ Area of Rectangular part OACD = Area of OACD + Area of ABC.
A1 = OA × OD = v0.t. ……….. (1)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 13

2) Area of triangle ABC = A2
A2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)Base × height
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)AC × BC
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) t(v – v0).
But v – v0 = at
A2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)t.at = \(\frac{1}{2}\)at².
∴ Total area under graph = s = A1 + A2
s(n) = v0t + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at².
∴ s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at² is graphically proved.

Problems

Question 1.
A man walks on a straight road from his home to a market 2.5 km away with a speed of 5 km h-1. Finding the market closed, he instantly turns and walks back home with a speed of 7.5 km h-1. What is the (a) magnitude of average velocity and (b) average speed of the man over the time interval 0 to 50 minutes? [AP Mar. ’19. May ’18; TS Mar. ’18]
Solution:
Time taken by man to go from his home to
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 14

Time take by man to go from market to his home, t2 = \(\frac{2.5}{7.5}=\frac{1}{3}\)h
∴ Total time taken = t, + to = \(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{1}{3}=\frac{5}{6}h\)
= 50 min.
In time interval 0 to 50 min,
Total distance travelled = 2.5 + 2.5 = 5 km.
Total displacement = zero.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 15

Question 2.
A stone is dropped from a height 300 in and at the same time another stone is projected vertically upwards with a velocity of 100 m/sec. Find when and where the two stones meet. [AP Mar. ’16]
Solution:
Height h = 300 m ;
Initial velocity U0 = 100 m/s
Let the two stones will meet at a height ‘x’ above the ground.
For 1st stone h – x = \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt² …………. (1)
For 2nd stone x = u0t – \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt²
⇒ \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt² = u0t – x ……….. (2)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 16
Since t is same for the two stones
From equations 1 & 2.
h – x = u0t – x
⇒ u0t = h or time t = \(\frac{h}{u_0}=\frac{300}{100}\) = 3 sec.
∴ The two stones will meet 3 seconds after the 1st stone is dropped or 2nd stone is thrown up.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 3.
A car travels the first third of a distance with a speed of 10 kmph, the second third at 20 kmph and the last third at 60 kmph. What is its mean speed over the entire distance? [TS Mar. ’16; AP May ’14, AP Mar. ’18]
Solution:
Total distance = s;
distance travelled, s1 = \(\frac{s}{3}\) ;
velocity, v1 = 10 kmph
distance, s2 = \(\frac{s}{3}\)
velocity, v2 = 20 kmph
distance, s3 = \(\frac{s}{3}\)
velocity, v3 = 60 kmph
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 17
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 18

Question 4.
A bullet moving with a speed of 150 m s-1 strikes a tree and penetrates 3.5 cm before stopping. What is the magnitude of its retardation in the tree and the time taken for it to stop after striking the tree?
Solution:
Velocity of bullet, u = 150 m/s;
Final velocity, v = 0
Distance travelled, s = 3.5 cm = 3.5 × 10-2 m,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 19

Question 5.
A motorist drives north for 30 min at 85 km/h and then stops for 15 min. He continues travelling north and covers 130 km in 2 hours. What is his total displacement and average velocity?
Solution:
In first part:
Velocity, v1 = 85 kmph
Time, t1 = 30 min
Distance travelled, s1 = v1 t1
= 85 × \(\frac{30}{60}\) = 42.5 km

In second part:
Distance travelled, s2 = 0 ;
Time, t2 = 15.0 min.

In third part:
Distance travelled, s3 = 130 km ;
Time, t3 = 120 min = 2 hours
a) Total distance of the motorist,
s = s1 + s2 + s3 = 42.5 + 0 + 130 = 172.5 km

b) Total time travelled,
t = t1 + t2 + t3 = 30 + 15 + 120
= 165 minutes
= 2 hrs 45 minutes
= 2\(\frac{3}{4}\)hrs. = \(\frac{11}{4}\) hrs.
∴ Average velocity,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 20

Question 6.
A ball A is dropped from the top of a building and at the same time an identical ball B is thrown vertically upward from the ground. When the balls collide the speed of A is twice that of B. At what frac¬tion of the height of the building did the collison occur?
Solution:
Given at time of collision velocity of A = VA
= 2 × VB (velocity of B)
Let the body be dropped from a height h’.
Let the two stones collide at x from ground.
For the body dropped,
s = h – x = \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt² → (1)
For the body thrown up,
x = ut – \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt² → (2)
For the body dropped,
v = u + at ⇒ VA = gt → (3)
For the body thrown up,
v = u – gt ⇒ VB = u – gt → (4)
Given VA = 2VB
⇒ gt = 2 (u – gt) or u = \(\frac{3gt}{2}\) → (5)
Divide equation (1) with equation (2)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 21
∴ Fraction of height of collision = \(\frac{2}{3}\)

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 7.
Drops of water fall at regular intervals from the roof of a building of height 16 m. The first drop strikes the ground at the same moment as the fifth drop leaves the roof. Find the distances between successive drops.
Solution:
Height of building, h = 16 m
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 22
Number of drops, n = 5
∴ Number of intervals = n – 1 = 5 – 1 = 4
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 23
Time interval between drops = \(\frac{1.8}{4}\)
= 0.45 sec
Time of travel of 1st drop, t1 = 4 × 0.45 = 1.8
∴ Distance travelled by
1st drop, S1 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt²1 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8 × 1.8 × 1.8= 16 m

For 2nd drop, t2 = 3 × 0.45 = 1.35 sec.,
∴ S2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8 × 1.35²
= 4.9 × 1.822 ≅ 1.822 ≅ 9m

For 3rd drop, t3 = 2 × 0.45 = 0.9 sec.
Distance, S3 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt²3 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8 × 0.9² = 3.97≅4 m

For 4th drop, t4 = 1 × 0.45 = 0.45 sec
Distance travelled, S4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt²4 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8 × (0.45)² = 1

For 5 th drop, t5 = 0 ⇒ S5 = 0
Distance between 1st and 2nd drop
S1, 2 = S1 – S2 = 16 – 9 = 7 m

Distance between 2nd and 3rd drop
S2, 3 = S2 – S<3 = 9 – 4 = 5m

Distance between 3rd and 4th drop
S3, 4 = S3 – S4 = 4 – 1= 3 m

Distance between 4th and 5th drop
S4, 5 = S4 – S5 = 1 – 0 = 1 m

∴ Distances between successive drops are 7m, 5m, 3m and lm.

Question 8.
Rain is falling vertically with a speed of 35 ms-1. A woman rides a bicycle with a speed of 12 ms-1 in east to west direction. What is the direction in which she should hold her umbrella? [TS June ’15]
Solution:
Velocity of rain VR = 35 m/s (vertically)
Velocity of women Vw = 12 m/s (towards east)
Resultant angle θ = tan-1 \(\frac{V_W}{V_R}=\frac{12}{35}\)
∴ θ = tan-1\(\frac{12}{35}\) = 0.343. or q = 19° (Nearly)
She should hold umbrella at an angle of 19c with east.

Question 9.
A hunter aims a gun at a monkey hanging from a tree some distance away. The monkey drops from the branch at the moment he fires the gun hoping to avoid the bullet. Explain why the monkey made a wrong move.
Solution:
Let the bullet is fired with an angle α and distance from hunter’s rifle to monkey = x
Vertical component of velocity vxy = v sin α
when exactly aimed at monkey sy = v sin α
t = h
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 24

But due to acceleration due to gravity
h1 = u sin α t – \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt² = h – \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt² → (1)
So bullet passes through a height of \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt² below the monkey.
But when the monkey is falling freely height of fall during time t = \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt²
So new height is \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt² → (2)

From equations (1) & (2) h1 is same i.e., if the monkey is dropped from the branch bullet will hit it exactly.

Question 10.
A food packet is dropped from an aero-plane, moving with a speed of 360 kmph in a horizontal direction, from a height of 500m. Find (i) its time of descent (ii) the horizontal distance between the point at which the food packet reaches the ground and the point above which it was dropped.
Solution:
Velocity of plane, V = 360 kmph
= 360 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 100 m/s

Height above ground, h = 500 m;
g = 10 m/s²

i) Time of descent,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 25
ii) Horizontal distance between point o{ dropping and point where it reaches the ground = Range R
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 26

Question 11.
A ball is tossed from the window of a building with an initial velocity of 8 ms-1 at an angle of 20° below the horizontal. It strikes the ground 3 s later. From what height was the ball thrown? How far from the base of the building does the ball strike the ground?
Solution:
Initial velocity, u = 8 m/s;
Angle of projection, θ = 20°
Time taken to reach the ground, t = 3 sec
Horizontal component of initial velocity,
ux = u. cos θ = 8 cos 20°
= 8 × 0.94 = 7.52 m/s

Vertical component of initial velocity,
vy = u sin θ = 8 sin 20°
= 8 × 0.342 = 2.736 m/s

a) From equation of motion, s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at²
we can write
h = (u sin θ)t + \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt²
⇒ h = (2.736)3 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)9.8 × (3)²
⇒ h = 8.208+ 4.9 × 9
⇒ h = 8.208 + 44.1 or h = 52.308 m
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 27

b) Horizontal distance travelled, sx = vx x t = 7.52 × 3 = 22.56 m

Question 12.
Two balls are projected from the same point in directions 30° and 60° with respect to the horizontal. What is the ratio of their initial velocities if they (a) attain the same height? (b) have the same range?
Solution:
Angle of projection of first ball, θ1 = 30°
Angle of projection of second ball, θ2 = 60°
Let u1 and u2 be the velocities of projections of the two balls.
i) Maximum height of first ball,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 28
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 29

ii) If the balls have same range, then R1 = R2
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 30

Question 13.
A ball is thrown vertically upwards with a velocity of 20 ins’1 from the top of a multistorey building. The height of the point from where the ball is thrown is 25.0 m from the ground. [TS May ’17; AP & TS Mar. ’15]
(a) How high will the ball rise?
(b) How long will it be before the ball hits the ground?
Take g = 10 ms-2 [Actual value of ‘g’ is 9.8 ms-2]
(OR)
When a ball is thrown vertically upwards with a velocity of 20 ms-1 from the top of a multistorey building, the height of the point from where the ball is thrown is 25.0 m from the ground. [TS Mar. ’15]
a) How high will the ball rise? and
b) How long will it be before the ball hits the ground?
Solution:
Initial velocity V0 = 20 m/s;
height above ground h0 = 2.50 m ;
g = 10 m/s²

a) For a body thrown up vertically height of rise
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line 31

b) Time spent in air (t) is y1 – y0 = V0t + \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt²
Where y1 = Total displacement of the body from ground = 0
∴ 0 = y0 + V0t+ \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt² = 25 + 20t – \(\frac{1}{2}\). 10 . t²
[∵ g = – 10 m/s² while going up]
∴ 0 = – 5t² + 20t + 25 (or) t² – 4t – 5 = 0
i.e., (t – 5) (t + 1) = 0 ⇒ t = 5 (or) t = – 1
But time is not – ve.
∴ Time spent in air t = 5 sec

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 3 Motion in a Straight Line

Question 14.
A parachutist flying in an aeroplane jumps when it is at a height of 3 km above the ground. He opens his parachute when he is about 1 km above ground. Describe his motion.
Answer:
Initially the path is a parabola as seen by an observer on the ground. It is a vertical straight line as seen by the pilot. He opens his parachute, it is moving vertically downwards with decreasing velocity and finally it reaches the ground.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 2nd Lesson Units and Measurements Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 2nd Lesson Units and Measurements

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between accuracy and precision. [AP Mar. ’15, ’16, May 16, 13, June 15; TS May ’18, Mar. ’15]
Answer:
Accuracy :
It indicates the closeness of a measurement to the true value of given quantity.
→ If the measurement is nearer to true value then accuracy is more.

Precision :
Precision of a measuring instrument depends on the limit (or) resolution of the quantity measured with that instrument.
→ If the least measurable value is less, then precision is more for that instrument.

Question 2.
What are the different types of errors that can occur in a measurement?
Answer:
Types of errors 1) Systematic errors and 2) Random errors.

Systematic errors are again divided into 1) Imperfectional errors 2) Environmental errors and 3) Personal errors.

Question 3.
How can systematic errors be minimised or eliminated? [AP May ’17; TS Mar. ’17; AP May ’17; TS Mar. ’17]
Answer:
Systematic errors can be minimised

  1. by improving experimental techniques,
  2. by selecting better instruments,
  3. by taking mean value of number of readings and
  4. by removing personal errors as far as possible.

Question 4.
Illustrate how the result of a measurement is to be reported indicating the error involved.
Answer:
Suppose length of an object is measured with a metre rod with least count equal to 0.1 cm. If the measured length is 62.5 cm, it has to be recorded as (62.5 ± 0.1) cm, stating the limits of error. Similarly, suppose time period of a pendulum is measured to be 2.0 sec, using a stopwatch of least count 0.1 sec, it has to be recorded as (2.0 ± 0.1) sec. It indicates that time period is in the range of 1.9 sec and 2.1 sec.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 5.
What are significant figures and what do they represent when reporting the result of a measurement? [TS Mar. ’18]
Answer:
Significant figures represents all practically measured digits plus one uncertain digit at the end.

When a result is reported in this way we can know up to what extent the value is reliable and also the amount of uncertainty in that reported value.

Question 6.
Distinguish between fundamental units and derived units. [TS Mar. ’16 ; AP May ’14]
Answer:
1) Fundamental units are used to measure fundamental quantities. Derived units are used to measure derived quantities.

2) Fundamental units are independent. Derived units are obtained by the combination of Fundamental units.
Ex: Metre is fundamental unit of length L’. metre/sec is derived unit of velocity which is a combination of fundamental unit metre and second.

Question 7.
Why do we have different units for the same physical quantity? [TS May ’16. June ’15]
Answer:
To measure the same physical quantity we have different units by keeping magnitude of the quantity to be measured.
Example:

  1. The measure astronomical distances we will use light year.
    1 light year = 9.468 × 1015m.
  2. To measure atomic distances we will use Angstrom A (or) Fermi.

Question 8.
What is dimensional analysis?
Answer:
Dimensional analysis is a tool to check the relations among physical quantities by using their dimensions.
Dimensional analysis is generally used to check the correctness of derived equations.

Question 9.
How many orders of magnitude greater is the radius of the atom as compared to that of the nucleus?
Answer:
Size of atom = 10-10 m,
Size of atomic nucleus = 10-14m.
Size of atom ÷ size of nucleus is \(\frac{10^{-10}}{10^{-14}}\) = 104
∴ Size of atom is 104 times greater than size of nucleus.

Question 10.
Express unified atomic mass unit in kg. [TS Mar. ’19]
Answer:
By definition,
1 a.m.u. = \(\frac{1}{12}\) × mass of an atom of 126C
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 1

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
The vernier scale of an instrument has 50 divisions which coincide with 49 main scale divisions. If each main scale division is 0.5 mm, then using this instrument what would be the minimum inaccuracy in the measurement of distance?
Answer:
Least count of Vernier Callipers = 1 MSD – 1 VSD
∴ L.C. = 1 MSD – \(\frac{49}{50}\)MSD = \(\frac{1}{50}\)MSD
= \(\frac{1}{50}\) × 0.5 = 0.01 m.m

Question 2.
In a system of units, the unit of force is 100N, unit of length is 10m and the unit of time is 100s. What is the unit of mass in this system?
Answer:
Here, F = MLT-2 = 100 N → (1) ;
L = 10 m ; T = 100s
∴ From equation (1)
M × (10) × (100)-2 = 100 ⇒ M × 10-3 = 100
⇒ M = \(\frac{100}{10^{-3}}\) ⇒ M = 105 kg.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 3.
The distance of a galaxy from Earth is of the order of 1025m. Calculate the order of magnitude of the time taken by light to reach us from the galaxy.
Answer:
Size of galaxy = 1025m,
Velocity of light, c = 3 × 108 ms-1
Time taken by light to reach earth,
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 2

While calculating the order of magnitude we will consider the powers of Ten only.
So order of magnitude of time taken by light to reach earth from galaxy is 1017 seconds.

Question 4.
The Earth-Moon distance is about 60 Earth radius. What will be the approximate diameter of the Earth as seen from the Moon?
Answer:
Earth moon distance, D = 60r.
Diameter of earth, b = 2r
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 3

Question 5.
Three measurements of the time for 20 oscillations of a pendulum give t1 = 39.6 s, t2 = 39.9 s and t3 = 39.5 s. What is the precision in the measurements? What is the accuracy of the measurements?
Answer:
Precision is the least measurable value with that instrument in our case precision is ±0.1 sec.

Calculation of accuracy :
Average value of measurements
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 4

Error in each measurement =
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 5

Precision ± 1 sec. In these measurements only two significant figures are believable. 3rd one is uncertain.

Adjustment of ∆amean upto given significant figure = 0.156 adjusted to 0.2.

So our value is accurate upto ±0.2

So our result is 39.67 ± 0.2, when significant figures taken into account it is 39.7 ± 0.2 sec.

Question 6.
1 calorie = 4.2 J where 1J = 1 kg m²s-2. Suppose we employ a system of units in which the unit of mass is α kg, the unit of length is β m and the unit of time γ s, show that a calorie has a magnitude 4.2 α-1 β-2 γ² in the new system.
Answer:
Here, 1 calorie = 4.2 J = 4.2 kg m² / s² → (1)
As new unit of mass = α kg
∴ 1 kg = \(\frac{1}{\alpha}\) new unit of mass
⇒ α-1 new unit of mass

Similarly lm = β-1 new unit of length and 1s = γ-1 new unit of time

Putting these values in (1) we get
1 calorie = 4.2 (α-1 new unit of mass) (β-1 new unit of length)² (γ-1 new unit of time)-2
= 4.2 α-1 β-2 γ² new unit of energy, which was proved.

Question 7.
A new unit of length is chosen so that the speed of light in vacuum is 1 ms-2. If light takes 8 min and 20s to cover this distance, what is the distance between the Sun and Earth in terms of the new unit?
Answer:
Given that velocity of light in vacuum,
c = 1 new unit of length s-1
Time taken by light of Sun to reach Earth, t = 8 min 20s = 8 × 60 + 20 = 500 s
∴ Distance between the Sun and Earth, x = c × t
= 1 new unit of length s-1 × 500s
= 500 new units of length.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 8.
A student measures the thickness of a human hair using a microscope of magnification 100. He makes 20 observations and finds that the average thickness (as viewed in the microscope) is 3.5 mm. What is the estimate of the thickness of hair?
Answer:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 6
∴ Thickness of hair is 0.035 mm

Question 9.
A physical quantity X is related to four mea-surable quantities a, b, c and d as follows:
X = a²b³C5/2d-2
The percentage error in the measurement of a, b, c and d are 1%, 2%, 3% and 4% respectively. What is the percentage error in X?
Answer:
Here, X = a²b³C5/2d-2
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 7
The percentage error in X is ± 23.5 %

Question 10.
The velocity of a body is given by v = At² + Bt + C. If v and t are expressed in SI, what are the units of A, B and C?
Answer:
From principle of Homogeneity the terms At², Bt and C must have same dimensional formula of velocity ‘v’.
v = Velocity = LT-1 ⇒ CT-1 = A [T²]
∴ A = \(\frac{LT^{-1}}{T^2}\) = LT-3 . So unit of A is m/sec³
LT-1 = BT ⇒ B = LT-2 So unit of B is m/sec²
LT-1 = C So unit of C is m/sec.

Dimensional formulae of physical quantities
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 8 TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 9
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 10

Problems

Question 1.
In the expression P = El² m-5 G-2 the quantities E, l, m and G denote energy, angular momentum, mass and gravitational constant respectively. Show that P is a dimensionless, quantity.
Solution:
Here, P = El² m-5 G-2
Here,
I = energy,
l = angular momentum
m = mass
G = gravitational constant
= [M L²T-2][ML²T-1]² [M]-5 [M-1L³T-2]-2
= M1+2+5+2 L2+4-6 T-2-2+4
P = [M° L° T°]
Hence, P is a dimensionless quantity.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 2.
If the velocity of light c, Planck’s constant, h and the gravitational constant G are taken as fundamental quantities; then express mass, length and time in terms of dimensions of these quantities.
Solution:
Here, c = [L T-1] ; h = [ML²T-1]
G = [M-1L³T-2]
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 11
Applying the principle of homogeneity of dimensions, we get

y – z = 1 → (2) ; x + 2y + 3z = 0 → (3) ; – x – y – 2z = 0 → (4)
Adding eq. (2), eq. (3) and eq. (4),
2y – 1 ⇒ y = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
∴ From eq. (2) z = y – 1 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) – 1 = \(\frac{-1}{2}\)
From eq. (4) x = -y – 2z = \(\frac{-1}{2}\) + 1 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Substituting the values of x, y & z in eq. (1), we get
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 12

Question 3.
An artificial satellite is revolving around a planet of mass M and radius R, in a circular orbit of radius r. Using dimensional analysis show that the period of the satellite.
T = \(\frac{k}{R} \sqrt{\frac{r^3}{g}}\)
where k is a dimensionless constant and g is acceleration due to gravity.
Solution:
Given that
T² ∝ r³ or T ∝ r3/2 Also T is a function of g and R
Let T ∝ r3/2 ga Rb where a, b are the dimen¬sions of g and R.
(or) T = k r3/2 ga Rb → (1)
where k is dimensionless constant of proportionality
From equation (1)
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 13
Applying the principle of homogeneity of dimensions, we get

a + b + \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 0 → (2) ∴ -2a = 1 ⇒ a = \(\frac{-1}{2}\)
From eq (1), \(\frac{-1}{2}\) + b + \(\frac{3}{2}\) = 0 ⇒ b = -1
Substituting the values of a’ and b’ in eq. (1), we get
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 14
This is the required relation.

Question 4.
State the number of significant figures in the following
a) 6729 b) 0.024 c) 0,08240 d) 6.032 e) 4.57 x 108
Solution:
a) In 6729 all are significant figures.
∴ Number of significant figures Four.

b) In 0.024 the zeroes to the left of 1st non-zero digit of a number less than one are not significant.
∴ Number of significant figures Two.

c) 0.08240 – Significant figures Four.

d) In 6.032 the zero between two non-zero digits is significant.
So, number of significant figures in 6.023 are 4.

e) 4.57 × 108 – Significant figures Three. [In the representation of powers of Ten our rule is only significant figures must be given].

Question 5.
A stick has a length of 12.132 cm and another has a length of 12.4 cm. If the two sticks are placed end and to what is the total length? If the two sticks are placed side by side, what is the difference in their lengths?
Solution:
a) When placed end to end total length is l = l1 + l2
l1 = 12.132 cm and l2 = 12.4 cm.
∴ l1 + l2 = 12.132 + 12.4 = 24.532 cm.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 15

In addition final answer must have least number of significant numbers in that addition, i.e., one after decimal point.
So our answer is 24.5 cm. b) For difference use l1 – l2
i.e., 12.4- 12.132 = 0.268 cm.
In subtraction final answer must be adjusted to least number of significant figures in that operation.

Here least number is one digit after decimal. By applying round off procedure our answer is 0.3 cm.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 6.
Each side of a cube is measured to be 7.203 m. What is (i) the total surface area and (ii) the volume of the cube, to appropriate significant figures?
Solution:
Side of cube, a = 7.203 m.
So number of significant figures are Four.
i) Surface area of cube = 6a²
= 6x 7.203 × 7.203 = 311.299

But our final answer must be rounded to least number of significant figures is four digits.
So surface area of cube = 311.3 m²
ii) Volume of cube, V = a³ = (7.203)³
= 373.147
But the answer must be limited to Four significant figures.
∴ Volume of sphere, V = 373.1 m³.

Question 7.
The measured mass and volume of a body are 2.42 g and 4.7 cm³ respectively with possible errors 0.01 g and 0.1 cm³. Find the maximum error in density.
Solution:
Mass, m = 2.42 g ; Error, ∆m = 0.01 g.
Volume, V = 4.7 cm³, Error, ∆V = 0.1 cc.
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 16
Maximum % error in density = % error in mass + % error in volume Maximum percentage error in density
= \(\frac{1}{2.42}+\frac{10}{4.7}\) = 0.413 + 2.127 = 2.54%

Question 8.
The error in measurement of radius of a sphere is 1%. What is the error in the measurement of volume? [AP Mar. ’19]
Solution:

Question 9.
The percentage error in the mass and speed are 2% and 3% respectively. What is the maximum error in kinetic energy calculated using these quantities?
Solution:
Percentage change in mass = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{m}}\) × 100 = 2%
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 18

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements

Question 10.
One mole of an ideal gas at standard temperature and pressure occupies 22.4 L (molar volume). If the size of the hydrogen molecule is about 1Å, what is the ratio of molar volume to the atomic volume of a mole of hydrogen?
Solution:
Size of Hydrogen atom ≈ 1Å = 10-10 m = 10-8cm
V1 = Atomic volume = number of atoms × volume of atom.
One mole gas contains n’ molecules.
Avogadro Number, n = 6.022 × 1023
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 2 Units and Measurements 19
V2 = Molar volume of 1 mol. gas = 22.4 lit
= 2.24 × 104C.C
∵ 1 lit = 1000 c.c.
∴ Ratio of molar volume to atomic volume = V2 : V1
= 2.24 × 104 : 2.523 ≅ 104 m.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

Telangana TSBIE TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 1st Lesson Physical World Textbook Questions and Answers.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 1st Lesson Physical World

Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What is Physics? [TS Mar. ’16]
Answer:
Physics is a branch of science which deals with the study of nature and natural phenomena.

Question 2.
What is the discovery of C.V. Raman? [AP Mar. ’18, 14; May 18, 16, 14; TS Mar. ’19, ’18, ’17]
Answer:
C.V. Raman’s contribution to physics is Raman effect. It deals with scattering of light by molecules of a medium when they are excited to vibrational energy levels.

Question 3.
What are the fundamental forces in nature? [TS May ’18]
Answer:
There are four fundamental forces in nature that govern the diverse phenomena of the macroscopic and the microscopic wu.m. These are the ‘gravitational force’, the ‘electromagnetic force’, the ‘strong nuclear force’, and the ‘weak nuclear force’.

Question 4.
Which of the following has symr etry?
a) Acceleration due to gravity.
b) Law of gravitation.
Answer:
Acceleration due to gravity varies from place to place. So it has no symmetry.
Law of gravitation has symmetry, because it does not depend on any physical quantity.

Question 5.
What is the contribution of S. Chandra Sekhar to Physics?
Answer:
S. Chandra Sekhar discovered the structure and evolution of stars. He defined “Chandra Sekhar limit” which is used in the study of black holes.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

Question 6.
What is beta (β) decay? Which force is a function of it?
Answer:
In β-decay the nucleus emits an electron and an uncharged particle called neutrino.

β – decay is due to weak nuclear forces.

❖ Some physicists and their major contributions

Name Major contribution/ Discovery
1. Archimedes Principle of buoyancy, Principle of the lever
2. Galileo Galilei Law of inertia
3. Isaac Newton Universal law of gravitation; Laws of motion, Corpuscular theory of light; Reflecting telescope.
4. C.V.Raman Inelastic scattering of light by molecules.
5. Edwin Hubble Expanding universe
6. Hideki Yukawa Theory of nuclear forces
7. S. Chandrasekhar Chandrasekhar limit, structure and evolution of stars
8. Michael Faraday Electromagnetic induction laws
9. James Clark Maxwell Electromagnetic theory – light – electromagnetic waves
10. J.J.Thomson Electron
11. Albert Einstein Explanation of photoelectric effect and theory of relativity
12. R.A.Millikan Measurement of charge of electron.
13. Ernest Rutherford Nuclear model of atom
14. John Bardeen Transistors; Theory of super conductivity.

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

❖ Fundamental forces of nature

Name Relative strength (N)
1. Gravitational force 10-39
2. Weak nuclear forces 10-13
3. Electromagnetic forces 10-2
4. Strong nuclear forces 1

 

❖ Fundamental constants of Physics

Physical constant Symbol Value
1. Speed of light in vacuum C 3 × 108 meter/sec
2. Planck’s constant h 6.63 × 10-34 joule.sec
3. Molar gas constant R 8.31 joule/mole.K
4. Avogadro’s number NA 6.02 × 1023/ mol
5. Boltzmann’s constant K 1.38 × 10-23/mol
6. Gravitational constant G 6.67  10-11 Newton.m2/kg2
7. Mechanical equivalent of heat J 4.185 joule/cal.
8. Triple point of water Ttr 273.16 K
9. Density of water at 20° C dω 103kg/m3
10. Density of mercury dm 13.6 × 103 kg/m3
11. Density of dry air at N.T.P. da 1.293 kg /m3
12. Specific heat of water sω 1 cal./gm/°C
13. Latent heat of ice Lf 80 cal./gm
14. Latent heat of steam Lυ 540 cal/gm (or 539)
15. √5 = 2.236, √3 = 1-732, √10 = 3.162, loge 10 = 2.3026
16. π = 3.14, π2 = 9.87, √π = 1.7772, √2 = 1.414

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

❖ Conversion factors:
1 metre – 100 cm
1 millimeter – 10-3m
1 inch – 2.54 × 10-2m
1 micron (µ) – 10-4cm
1 Angstrom (A°) – 10-8cm
1 fermi (f) – 10-13 cm
1 kilometer – 10³ m
1 light year – 9.46 × 1015 m
1 litre – 10³cm³
1 kilogram – 1000 gm
1 metricton – 1000 kg
1 pound – 453.6 gm
1 atomic mass
unit (a.m.u) 1.66 × 10-27 kg
1 a.m.u – 931 MeV
1 day – 8.640 × 104 seconds
1 km/hour – \(\frac{5}{18}\) m/sec (or)
0.2778 meter/sec.
1 Newton – 105 dynes
1 gm wt – 980.7 dynes
1 kg.wt – 9.807 Newton
1 Newton/meter² – 1 pascal
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World 1
1 Pascal – 10 dyne/cm²
1 Joule – 107 erg
1 kilo watt hour – 3.6 × 106 joule
1 electro volt (ev) – 1.602 × 10-19 joule
1 watt – 1 joule / sec
1 horse power (HP) – 746 watt
1 degree (° ) – 60 minute (‘)
1 Radian – 57.3 degree ( ° )
1 Poise – 1 dyne . sec / cm²
1 Poiseuille – 10 poise
(Newton, sec/m² (or) Pascal sec.)

❖ Important Prefixes:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World 2

❖ The Greek Alphabet:
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World 3

❖ Formulae of geometry :
1. Area of triangle = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × base × height
2. Area of parallelogram = base × height
3. Area of square = (length of one side)²
4. Area of rectangle = length × breadth
5. Area of circle = πr² (r = radius of circle)
6. Surface area of sphere = 4πr² (r = radius of sphere)
7. Volume of cube = (length of one side of cube)³
8. Volume of parallelopiped = length × breadth × height
9. Volume of cylinder = πr²l
10. Volume of sphere = \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr³
Circumference of square = 4l
11. Volume of cone = \(\frac{1}{3}\) πr²h
12. Circumference of circle = 2πr

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

❖ Formulae of algebra:
(a + b)² = a² + b² + 2ab
(a – b)² = a² + b² – 2ab
(a² – b²) = (a + b) (a – b)
(a + b)³ = a³ + b³ + 3ab (a + b)
(a – b)³ = a³ – b³ – 3ab (a – b)
(a + b)² – (a – b)² = 4ab
(a + b)² + (a – b)² = 2(a² + b²)

❖ Formulae of differentiation:
1. \(\frac{d}{dx}\) (constant) = 0
differentiation with respect to x = \(\frac{d}{dx}\)
2. \(\frac{d}{dx}\) (xn) = n xn – 1
3. \(\frac{d}{dx}\) (sin x) = cos x
4. \(\frac{d}{dx}\) (cos x) = – sin x dx

❖ Formulae of Integration:
Integration with respect to x = ∫dx
1. ∫dx = x
2. ∫xn dx = r n + 1
3. ∫sin x dx = cos x + c
4. ∫cos x dx = sin x + c

❖ Formulae of logarithm :
1. log mn = (log m + log n)
2. log\(\frac{m}{n}\) = (log m – log n)
3. log mn = n log m

❖ Value of trigonometric functions :
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World 4

TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World

❖ Signs of trigonometrical ratios :
sin (90° – θ) = cos θ ; sin (180° – θ) = sin θ
cos (90° – θ) = sin θ ; cos (180° – θ) = – cos θ
tan (90° – θ) = cot θ ; tan (180° – θ) = – tan θ

❖ According to Binomial theorem :
(1 + x)n ≈ (1 + nx) if x < < 1

❖ Quadratic equation:
ax² + bx + c = 0
TS Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 1 Physical World 5